JP2023165897A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's degree of attention to a game by expanding the player's options.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a non-electric accessory; and a crane 53E permitting entry of game balls flowing down a game area. The crane 53E includes: a first ball entry part for preventing a shift of the non-electric accessory from a closed state to an open state on the basis of entry of game balls; and a second ball entry part for permitting a shift of the non-electric accessory from a closed state to an open state on the basis of entry of game balls. The game machine starts a game in a specific control state when game balls enter one of the non-electric accessory, the first ball entry part, and the second ball entry part, and starts one of four round games or 16 round games when game balls enter the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 64

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a game board is equipped with a firing means that fires game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and when the game balls enter an operating port (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes this is known (for example, see Patent Document 1). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-074175

However, after the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to the specific control state, it follows the same flow and starts the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the player's action is involved. There is a problem in that the series of steps from transitioning the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can expand the choices of players and increase the attention of the players to the game.

The game machine of the present invention includes a firing means for firing a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. and a gaming state transition that shifts the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine having means for allowing game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, and a closed state for preventing game balls flowing down the gaming area from entering, The game ball flowing down the gaming area is selected based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means that shifts from the open state to the closed state based on the ball, and the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. The variable ball entry means allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter the variable ball entry means, and the variable ball entry means changes the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state based on the entry of the game ball. A first ball entry means that does not allow the game ball to enter the open state, and a variable ball entry means that allows the game ball that enters the ball entry means to enter the ball entry means, and shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. and a second ball entering means, and the gaming state transition means transfers the gaming state to any one of the opening/closing ball entering means, the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means after shifting the gaming state to the specific control state. The game includes a specific control starting means for starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball enters a corner, and the game in the specific control state is a first specific game and a player who receives a higher value than the first specific game. and a second specific game to be given to the user, and the specific control starting means is configured to apply the first specific game and the second specific game when the game ball enters either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. The game is characterized by starting one of the specific games.

According to the present invention, a player's options can be expanded, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

A front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention Front view of game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism Diagram showing the movement of game balls in the discharge route and the croon route An enlarged view of the vicinity of the croon seen from above. Diagram of non-electric accessories viewed from the back side of the game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of non-motorized accessories Enlarged view of the vicinity of non-motorized accessories Side view of non-electric accessories Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery Diagram showing a win/fail table that stores the values of random numbers that will win the jackpot Diagram showing a distribution table that stores random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing Diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for round game execution gate A diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the actuation port. Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game time control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing Diagram showing a flowchart of gaming state transition processing Diagram showing a flowchart of the process of setting the number of rounds Diagram showing a flowchart of the grand prize opening opening/closing process Diagram showing a flowchart of the big prize opening opening process Diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when opening/closing execution mode ends Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and display control device A diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the audio emission control device. Diagram showing a flowchart of production determination processing Diagram showing a flowchart of the process of determining the number of rounds Diagram showing the relationship between game results and game status, etc. Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not released and shifts to opening/closing execution mode Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-motorized accessory is opened. A front view of a game board according to a second embodiment of the present invention Exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the croon, viewed diagonally from above. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not released and shifts to opening/closing execution mode A perspective view showing the flow in which the game ball is guided to the discharge passage after the ball enters the 4th round execution gate. A perspective view showing the flow in which the game ball is guided to the communication passage after the ball enters the 4th round execution gate. Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not released and shifts to opening/closing execution mode A perspective view showing the flow in which the game ball is guided to the discharge passage after the ball enters the 16th round execution gate. A perspective view showing the flow in which the game ball is guided to the communication passage after the ball enters the 16th round execution gate. A front view of a game board according to a third embodiment of the present invention Exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the croon, viewed diagonally from above. Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not released and shifts to opening/closing execution mode Top view of Kroon when a ball enters the 4th round execution gate Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not released and shifts to opening/closing execution mode Top view of Croon when a ball enters the 16th round execution gate A front view of a game board according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention An enlarged view of the vicinity of the croon seen from above. A front view of a game board according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention Diagram showing the internal structure of non-electric accessories Diagram showing the internal structure of the non-motorized accessory when a ball enters the 16th round execution gate Diagram showing the internal structure of a non-motorized accessory when a ball enters the non-motorized accessory Diagram showing the internal structure of a non-motorized accessory after a ball enters the non-motorized accessory An enlarged view of the clone according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention viewed from above. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and display control device Diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for round game execution gate Diagram showing a flowchart of the process of setting the number of rounds Diagram showing a flowchart of setting processing for round game execution gate Diagram showing a flowchart of production determination processing Diagram showing a flowchart of round game execution gate determination processing A diagram showing an example of a process for determining an execution gate confirmation effect and an example of an execution gate confirmation effect. Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not released and shifts to opening/closing execution mode A diagram illustrating a process for determining an execution gate confirmation effect and another example of an execution gate confirmation effect. Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not released and shifts to opening/closing execution mode Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-motorized accessory is opened. A diagram showing a flowchart of a setting process for a round game execution gate according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. Diagram showing a flowchart of round game execution gate determination processing A diagram showing an example of a process for determining an execution gate confirmation effect and an example of an execution gate confirmation effect. A diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for a round game execution gate according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. Diagram showing a flowchart of the process of setting the number of rounds Diagram showing a flowchart of round game execution gate determination processing Diagram showing gate resetting effect A diagram illustrating an example of a process for determining an execution gate confirmation performance and an execution gate confirmation performance after executing a gate resetting performance. A front view of a game board according to a modification of the present invention Enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism A diagram showing a timing chart for opening and closing the vane member, valve body, and plate when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine that is a type of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, this pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body that is rotatably attached to the front (front side) with respect to the outer frame 11. 12.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) that is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right sides as a support side, and an inner frame (not shown) that is arranged in front of the inner frame and has both left and right sides. The front door frame 13 is supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right sides as the support side, and and a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

Note that the gaming machine main body 12 includes a locking device (not shown) provided at its rotating tip. This locking device has the function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and also has the function of locking the front door frame 13 against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 14 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 13 has a generally elliptical window section 21 provided to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted into the window section 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of glass and is transparent and colorless, but it may be made of synthetic resin or the like so that it is colorless and transparent.
The front door frame 13 also includes an indicator lamp section 23 provided above the window section 21 as part of a light emitting means constituted by various lamp sections provided around the window section 21, and an indicator lamp section. A speaker section 24 is provided on both the left and right sides of the window section 23 and outputs sound effects depending on the gaming situation, and an upper bulge section 25 and a lower bulge section 26 are provided below the window section 21. There is.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged vertically in parallel and are provided so as to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper tray 25a temporarily stores the game balls put out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 11) provided on the back pack unit, and then arranges them in a line while sending them to the game ball firing mechanism 81 (see FIG. 11). It has the function of guiding.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 25a.

Furthermore, the front door frame 13 is provided with a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. This firing handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to fire a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a gaming area provided above the inner frame. do. The firing handle 27 changes the firing strength, ie, the firing momentum, of the game ball fired toward the game area by changing its rotational operation amount.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The aforementioned gaming area is formed on the gaming board 31 so as to be partitioned by an inner rail section 32 and an outer rail section 33. Almost the entire area of this gaming area can be viewed from the front through the window 21.
The inner rail part 32 and the outer rail part 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for guiding game balls into the game area, and this guide rail 34 is used to fire balls from the game ball firing mechanism 81 when the player rotates the firing handle 27. The played game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed such that its exit portion is disposed on one side of the gaming area and faces toward the upper center of the gaming area. Therefore, as the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 27 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area changes from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. Shifting to the side. In this embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the gaming area.

The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings in the game area that are formed to penetrate in the front and rear direction by being router-processed. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning opening 35 provided at each opening, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry part) 36, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry part) 37, a variable winning apparatus 38, It has an outlet 39 and a non-electric accessory 51. This non-electric accessory 51 is provided on the lower right side of the general winning opening 35. Furthermore, the game board 31 has an opening 311 provided on the lower right side of the lower operating port 37 and an opening 312 provided below the non-electric accessory 51. The game board 31 also includes through gates 41 provided on the left side of the center and on the right side of the center, a main display device 42 provided on the right side of the top, and a variable display unit 43 provided in the center. have. Furthermore, the game board 31 has various members (accessories) such as a large number of nails 44 and a windmill installed in the game area in order to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls. ing.

The general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 are each equipped with detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 11) that detect the entry of game balls. The detection sensors 40a to 40d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 is equipped with a detection sensor 40a, the upper operation opening 36 is equipped with a detection sensor 40b, the lower operation opening 37 is equipped with a detection sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 is equipped with a detection sensor 40d. It is equipped with The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. Note that the detection sensors 40a to 40d may be of any type as long as they can individually detect winnings of game balls, and for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors may be used.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 35. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when a ball enters the lower operating port 37. The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable winning device 38. Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls for each operating port 36, 37 may be different.

The out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31. Game balls that have not entered the various winning holes etc. are discharged from the game area through this outlet 39. Further, the out port 39 includes a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40e is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Note that, when a ball enters the out hole 39, the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize ball, unlike when a ball enters any of the various winning holes.

The non-electric accessory 51 is provided on the lower left side of the game area of the game board 31. Further, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40f is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Note that, when a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51, the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out a prize ball, unlike when a ball enters any of the various winning holes. This non-electric accessory 51 will be explained in detail later.
In addition, the player sets the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 27 to a medium level, hits the ball to the left, and moves the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit part of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting to the upper left, the game ball can be guided to the upper operating port 36, the non-electric accessory 51, etc. (left-handed hitting route).

Each through gate 41 includes a detection sensor 40g (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40g is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Note that when a ball enters each through gate 41, the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize ball, unlike when a ball enters any of the various winning holes.

Here, entering the ball refers to the game ball passing through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the gaming area after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the gaming area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow without any changes. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 39, the entry of the game ball into the various winning openings will also be expressed as winning. Furthermore, entering the through gate 41 refers to a ball continuing to flow down the gaming area without being ejected from the gaming area after passing through a gate provided in the gaming area. The entry of the ball into the through gate 41 is also expressed as winning, similar to the entry of the ball into the various winning openings.

The upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are installed in the game board 31 as a unit as an operating port device. The operating ports 36 and 37 are both opened upward to allow game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, and the upper operating port 36 is disposed upward and the lower operating port 37 is disposed downward. They are arranged vertically in parallel. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory drive section 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operating port 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer to each other in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower operating port 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operating port 36 becomes narrower than one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operating port 36 is wider than one game ball. Therefore, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower operating port 37, and when it is set to the open state, the game ball cannot enter the lower operating port 37. can.

In addition, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, the electric accessory 37a has two states: a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the lower operation opening 37 (a state in which game balls can enter the lower operating port 37, unlike the closed state); It may be configured to switch between a state in which a game ball is likely to enter the operating port 37 and a state in which it is easy to win a prize. Further, the lower operating port 37 may be configured to perform such switching not by the setting of the electric accessory 37a but by displacement of the lower operating port 37. In this case, the lower operating port 37 37 may not include the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a grand prize opening 38a that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, an opening/closing door 38b for opening/closing the grand prize opening 38a, and an opening/closing door 38b. It is equipped with a variable prize winning drive section 38c.
The player sets the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 27 to the maximum and hits the ball to the right, changing the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 etc. (right-handed route).

Here, the game board 31 includes a cover 381 provided to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38. This cover 381 includes a transparent panel 381a that is formed to be transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the variable winning device 38 can be seen from the front side, and an opaque panel that is provided around this transparent panel 381a and is formed to be opaque. panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window 21.

The grand prize opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the gaming area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by being router-processed. As mentioned above, this big prize opening 38a is equipped with a detection sensor 40d that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the big prize opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b is in a closed state in which it moves forward toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to close the opening of the big prize opening 38a, and in a closed state in which it retreats toward the inside of the game board 31 and protrudes from the game board 31. 31, it has an open state in which the opening of the big prize opening 38a is opened.
The variable prize driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set in a closed state in which game balls cannot win. Then, when the player wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the internal lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can be won.
Note that the opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can enter the big prize opening 38a. Furthermore, in the opening/closing execution mode, the period from when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again is referred to as one round game.
In this way, the variable winning device 38 has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. It functions as an opening/closing ball entering means for paying out game balls.

The main display device 42 has a main display section 45 and an accessory display section 46, and displays a plurality of display devices such as a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner and a dot display. arranged and configured.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge out toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than the distance of one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the main display device 42.

The main display section 45 includes a first result display section 45a for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winnings in the upper operating port 36, and a first result display section 45a for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winnings in the lower operating port 37. It also includes a second result display section 45b for displaying the lottery results (see FIG. 11). The main display section 45 may further include a round display section for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display section 45a executes a fluctuating display of symbols using the winning in the upper operating port 36 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the fluctuating display, the internal lottery conducted based on the winning in the upper operating opening 36. Show results. If the result of this internal lottery is a result corresponding to transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display section 45b executes a fluctuating display of the symbols using the winning in the lower operating port 37 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the fluctuating display, the internal lottery conducted based on the winning in the lower operating port 37. Show results. If the result of this internal lottery is a result corresponding to transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 function as a starting ball entering means that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter and executes an internal lottery when the game ball enters.

The accessory display unit 46 executes a fluctuating display of symbols using winnings in each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the fluctuating display, an internal lottery conducted based on winnings in each through gate 41 is executed. Show results. The accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to transition to the electric power release state. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the power release state. In this electrically powered open state, the electrically powered accessory 37a provided in the lower operating port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In this embodiment, the main display section 45 and the accessory display section 46 are configured by segment displays, but are not limited to this, and may include a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, It may also be configured by other types of display devices such as a dot matrix. In addition, the patterns to be variably displayed on the main display section 45 and the accessory display section 46 include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, and a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed. , or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 arranged to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper part of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge out toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is reduced due to the falling of the game balls. The structure is as follows.

The symbol display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 47 starts displaying symbols in a variable manner based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. That is, when the symbol display device 47 executes a variable display on the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 and when executes a variable display on the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, A variable display is executed accordingly.
Note that the symbol display device 47 is not limited to being a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes four first holding lamp parts 49a provided in an area above the symbol display device 47, and four second holding lamp parts 49b provided in an area on the right side of the first holding lamp part 49a. , and four third holding lamp sections 49c provided in an area above the first holding lamp section 49a.

The first holding lamp part 49a is a part that displays the number of held game balls that have entered the upper operating port 36, and lights up according to the number of held game balls. This first holding lamp section 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display section 45a and the symbol display device 47.
The second holding lamp section 49b is a part that displays the number of held game balls that have entered the lower operation opening 37, and lights up according to the number of held game balls. The second holding lamp section 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display section 45b and the symbol display device 47.
The third holding lamp section 49c is a part that displays the number of held game balls that have entered each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of held game balls. This third holding lamp section 49c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display section 46.
Note that each of the holding lamp sections 49a to 49c may have another configuration, such as being displayed as an image on a part of a symbol display device 47, which will be described later.

The center frame 48 also includes a right variable ball entry mechanism 52 provided in the lower right region of the symbol display device 47 and a croon 53 provided in the left region of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. There is.
The right variable ball entry mechanism 52 allows the game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and then discharges them to the croon route that guides them to the croon 53 and to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. It has a function of guiding the game ball entered into the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the croon route or the ejection route by switching between the ejection route and the ejection route.
The player sets the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 27 to the maximum and hits the ball to the right, changing the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 etc. (right-handed hitting route).

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
As shown in FIG. 3, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 includes an introduction part 521 that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and a right variable ball entry mechanism at the introduction part 521. 52, a switching section 523 that switches the destination of the game balls guided in the guide path 522, a discharge port 524 provided at the guide destination of the guide path 522, and A guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4) is provided.

The introduction part 521 includes a blade member 521a provided on the game board 31 so as to close an entrance formed on the right side of the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52, and a blade member 521a provided around an axis perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 31. It includes a pin 521b that rotatably supports the blade member 521a, and a blade member driving section 521c that drives the blade member 521a.

The blade member 521a rotates counterclockwise around the pin 521b to switch between a closed state (dotted chain line in the figure) in which the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is closed and a clockwise rotation around the pin 521b. It has an open state (solid line in the figure) in which the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is opened by moving the ball (see arrow in the figure). In the open state, the blade member 521a is inclined so as to descend toward the entrance side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52.
The blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the blade member 521a.

Here, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to the closed state and the open state at a predetermined period. In other words, the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a predetermined period.
In this embodiment, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to a closed state for 1.5 seconds and an open state for 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds.
In addition, the introduction part 521 should just be configured so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the inside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the introduction part 521 can control the opening/closing timing of the blade member 521a and the opening/closing timing. The period can be set arbitrarily.

Therefore, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 along the blade member 521a using the slope of the blade member 521a. (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the blade member 521a is set to the closed state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 (dotted chain line in the figure).

The guide passage 522 is formed with a width that does not allow a plurality of game balls to pass through the passage at the same time. Further, the guide passage 522 branches into two in the middle, and has an upstream guide passage 522a located upstream of this branch, and two downstream guide passages 522b and 522c located downstream. .
Note that the guide passage 522 is formed to be transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the inside thereof can be viewed from the front side.

The upstream guide passage 522a guides the game ball entered into the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by the introduction part 521 from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the branch position of the guide passage 522. This upstream guide passage 522a is inclined so as to descend from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 toward the branching position of the guide passage 522. Therefore, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide path 522 along the upstream guide path 522a using the slope of the upstream guide path 522a.

The downstream guide passage 522b is provided at a position close to the branch position of the guide passage 522. Further, the downstream guide passage 522b is formed along the vertically downward direction so as to cause the game ball to fall from the branch position of the guide passage 522. This downstream guide passage 522b guides the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a to the discharge port 524.
The downstream guide passage 522c is provided at a position far from the branch position of the guide passage 522. Further, the downstream guide passage 522c is formed to extend the game ball from the branching position of the guide passage 522 to the guide rail 525. This downstream guide path 522c guides the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide path 522 along the upstream guide path 522a to the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4).

Here, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 includes a detection sensor 40h (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40h is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40h detects the entry of a game ball into the downstream guide path 522c. Note that, when a ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize ball, unlike when a ball enters any of the winning holes. Further, the detection sensor 40h may be of any type as long as it can individually detect winnings of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor may be used.

The switching part 523 supports a plate 523a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522c, and the plate 523a rotatably about an axis perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 31. It includes a pin 523b and a plate drive section 523c that drives the plate 523a.

The plate 523a can be rotated clockwise around the pin 523b to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure), and can be rotated counterclockwise around the pin 523b. By doing so, it has an open state (solid line in the figure) in which the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522c is closed and the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b is opened. In the closed state, the plate 523a is inclined so as to descend toward the downstream guide passage 522c.
The plate drive unit 523c sets the plate 523a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the plate 523a.

Therefore, when the plate 523a is set to the open state by the plate drive unit 523c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b, and then enters the discharge port 524. guided (solid line in the figure). Thereafter, the game ball is discharged to the outside (game area) of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 via the discharge port 524 (discharge route).
On the other hand, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state by the plate drive unit 523c, the game ball that has reached the branching position of the guide path 522 passes along the plate 523a downstream using the slope of the plate 523a. After being guided to the entrance of the side guide passage 522c, it is guided to the guide rail 525 (double-dashed line in the figure). Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4) (crown route).

Here, the plate 523a is normally set in an open state (ejection route) in which game balls are not guided to the croon 53. Then, when the player wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the internal lottery and transitions to the opening/closing execution mode, the plate 523a is set to a closed state (croon route) in which the game ball is guided to the croon 53.
Further, when the aforementioned detection sensor 40h detects the entry of a game ball into the downstream guide passage 522c, the plate 523a is in an open state (discharge route) in which the game ball is not guided to the croon 53. will be set again.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the clone 53 selects the game balls flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry means that allows ball entry.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the movement of the game ball in the ejection route and the croon route. Specifically, FIGS. 4(A) and (B) are diagrams showing the movement of the game ball in the discharge route, and FIGS. 4(C) and (D) are diagrams showing the movement of the game ball in the croon route. It is.
When the blade member 521a is set to the closed state, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 as shown in FIG. 4(A) (see the arrow in the figure). This is true whether it is a discharge route or a croon route.

On the other hand, when the blade member 521a is set in the open state, the game ball travels along the blade member 521a using the slope of the blade member 521a, as shown in FIGS. 4(B) and (C). The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52.
When the discharge route is set by setting the plate 523a in the open state, the game balls that have reached the branch position of the guide path 522 are guided to the discharge port 524 as shown in FIG. 4(B). (See arrow in figure). Thereafter, the game ball is discharged to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 (game area) via the discharge port 524.

The game balls discharged to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the discharge port 524 are directed to the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the out port 39 by changing the falling direction with the nail 44. I'm going to pitch in.
In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball discharged to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 via the discharge port 524 enters the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the out port 39. However, for example, it may be designed so that the ball enters only the out port 39. In short, the flow path of the game balls after being discharged into the game area may be designed in any manner.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game ball is discharged into the game area through the discharge port 524, but instead of being discharged into the game area, for example, the game ball enters the out port 39 by the same route as the game ball. It may also be collected through the

In addition, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state to set the croon route, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide path 522 is guided to the guide rail 525 as shown in FIG. 4(C). (see arrow in the figure). Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525, as shown in FIG. 4(D).

FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the croon seen from above.
As shown in FIG. 5, the croon 53 includes a disc-shaped rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525, and a disc-shaped rolling surface 531 provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 531. A side wall 532 is provided.
Note that the guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from its center, and has three holes 533A to 533C formed at equal intervals from each other; The protrusion 534 has three side surfaces that slope downward toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is sloped downward from the side wall 532 toward the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C (Fig. (See middle arrow A).

Each hole 533A to 533C is provided with a detection sensor 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40i to 40k is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533C. Detects the entry of game balls. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when balls enter each of the holes 533A to 533C, unlike when balls enter various winning holes. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be of any type as long as they can individually detect winnings of game balls, and for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors may be used.

Each of the holes 533A to 533C serves as an opportunity to start a round game when the player wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery, and after transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Specifically, when a ball enters the hole 533A, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing a 16-round game, so it starts executing a 16-round game in the hole 533A. Marks are displayed around the hole 533A to suggest this.
Furthermore, when a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing four round games. The mark is not displayed to suggest that it is.

In addition, the croon 53 is connected to a hole 533A formed on the front side (front side) of the game board 31, and the game ball that enters the hole 533A and falls downward as shown by arrow B in the figure. is connected to a communication passage 535 that guides the non-electric accessory 51 to two holes 533B and 533C formed on the back side (rear side) of the game board 31, and as shown by arrow C in the figure, the hole A discharge passage 536 is provided for discharging game balls that have entered the balls 533B and 533C and fallen downward into the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 6 is a diagram of the non-electric accessory viewed from the back side of the game board. FIG. 9 is a side view of the non-electric accessory.
As shown in FIGS. 6 and 9, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a pair of upper blade members 511 provided above the game board 31 so as to face each other in the horizontal direction, and a lower end of each upper blade member 511. A pair of rotating shafts 512 that are fixed and rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31, and a pair of plate-like bodies 513 that have one end fixed to each rotating shaft 512. A pair of upper gears 514 are provided concentrically fixed to each rotation shaft 512.

In addition, the non-electric accessory 51 is fixed to a pair of lower blade members 515 provided below each upper blade member 511 so as to face each other in the horizontal direction, and to the upper end of each lower blade member 515. A pair of rotating shafts 516 that are rotatably provided around an axis perpendicular to the surface of the board 31, and a pair of rotating shafts 516 that are provided to mesh with each of the upper gears 514 and are concentrically fixed to each rotating shaft 516. A lower gear 517 is provided.

In the closed state of the non-electric accessory 51, each upper blade member 511 has opposing surfaces 511A that face each other in the horizontal direction and are arranged along the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. 6(A). . Moreover, each upper blade member 511 is provided in the game area (the front side of the game board 31), as shown in FIG.
Each upper blade member 511 is provided so that a passage 511B formed between each opposing surface 511A has a width that does not allow a plurality of game balls to pass through at the same time. Further, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a baffle plate 51A provided above the entrance of the passage 511B. The distance between the upper end of each upper blade member 511 and the baffle plate 51A is narrower than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B when the non-electric accessory 51 is in the closed state.
The non-electric accessory 51 includes a cover 518 provided in the game area so as to cover each upper blade member 511 and the passage 511B.

As shown in FIG. 6(A), each plate-like body 513 is arranged at an obtuse angle with respect to the opposing surface 511A of each upper blade member 511. Specifically, when the non-electric accessory 51 is in the closed state, each plate-shaped body 513 is arranged so as to be inclined so as to approach the passage 511B from the upper end on the rotating shaft 512 side toward the lower end. . Here, each plate-like body 513 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a passage 51B that guides the game ball that has entered the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B to the back side of the game board 31, and each plate-shaped body 513 , one end is fixed to each rotating shaft 512 so as to close the outlet of this passage 51B.

Each lower blade member 515 is arranged at an obtuse angle with respect to the facing surface 511A of each upper blade member 511, as shown in FIG. 6(A). Specifically, each lower blade member 515 is arranged so as to be inclined so as to approach the passage 511B from the upper end on the rotating shaft 516 side toward the lower end when the non-electric accessory 51 is in the closed state. . Further, each lower blade member 515 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, as shown in FIG. Specifically, each lower blade member 515 is provided at a passing position of the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication passage 535 of the croon 53. Here, each lower blade member 515 has one end fixed to each rotation shaft 516 so as to close the discharge port 535A of the communication passage 535.

In this way, the communication passage 535 of the croon 53 described above communicates above each lower blade member 515.
Therefore, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53, falls downward, and is guided to the non-motorized accessory 51 via the communication passage 535, as shown in FIG. Fall towards 515. As shown in FIG. 6(B), the game ball that has fallen toward each of the lower blade members 515 is moved by rotating each of the lower blade members 515 around each rotation axis 516. Spread the lower ends apart (see arrow A in the figure).
In addition, after pushing apart the lower ends of each lower wing member 515, the game ball is discharged from the non-electric accessory 51 to the game area through the opening 312 through the discharge passage 51C.

Further, each rotation shaft 516 and each lower gear 517 rotate as each lower blade member 515 rotates, so each upper gear 514 rotates as each lower gear 517 rotates. Each upper blade member 511 and each plate-shaped body 513 rotates as each upper gear 514 rotates (see arrow B in the figure). As a result, the non-electric accessory 51 transitions from the closed state to the open state.

Here, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a non-electric accessory opening detection sensor 519 (see FIG. 11) that detects transition from the closed state to the open state. Note that the non-electric accessory opening detection sensor 519 may be of any type as long as it can detect the opening of the non-electric accessory 51, and for example, a contact type sensor can be adopted. .

The distance between the upper end of each upper blade member 511 and the baffle plate 51A is wider than one game ball as shown in FIG. 6(B) when the non-electric accessory 51 is in the open state. Therefore, the game ball can enter the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B when the non-electric accessory 51 is in the open state.
Here, each plate-shaped body 513 rotates around each rotation shaft 512 so as to close the passage 51B when the non-electric accessory 51 is in the open state.

Therefore, the game ball that enters the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B is guided to the back side of the game board 31 through the passage 51B, and then rotates around each rotation axis 512 into each plate-shaped ball. By rotating the plate members 513, the lower ends of each plate member 513 are pushed apart.
In addition, after pushing apart the lower ends of each plate-shaped body 513, the game ball is discharged from the non-electric accessory 51 to the game area through the opening 312 through the discharge passage 51C.

Further, each rotation shaft 512 and each upper gear 514 rotate as each plate-shaped body 513 rotates, so each lower gear 517 rotates as each upper gear 514 rotates. Each lower blade member 515 rotates as each lower gear 517 rotates. As a result, the non-electric accessory 51 transitions from the open state to the closed state.

The non-electric accessory 51 is an opportunity to start a round game when the player wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if the pachinko machine 10 wins a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery and a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 after transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Here, entry of the ball into the non-electric accessory 51 is determined by detecting with the detection sensor 40f whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge passage 51C. In other words, when the non-electric accessory 51 is in the open state, a game ball that enters the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B, and when the non-electric accessory 51 is in the closed state, the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535. The game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 is determined to be a ball that has entered the non-electric accessory 51.

Specifically, when a ball enters the non-motorized accessory 51, the pachinko machine 10 starts playing a 16-round game. The characters "16R", which means to start playing the game, are displayed (see FIG. 2).
In addition, in the following explanation, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A that start the execution of 16 round games will be referred to as the 16 round execution gate, and the holes 533B and 533C that will start the execution of the 4 round games will be referred to as 4 round game execution gates. It is called a round execution gate, and the 16 round execution gate and the 4 round execution gate are also collectively referred to as the round game execution gate.

Therefore, the non-electric accessory 51 has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which it does not allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter. It functions as an opening/closing entry means that shifts from an open state to a closed state based on the following.
The non-electric accessory 51 includes plate-shaped bodies 513 (first receiving portions) that receive game balls that enter the non-electric accessory 51, and lower blade members 515 that receive game balls that enter the hole 533A. (second receiving part), and by receiving the game ball with each plate-shaped body 513, it shifts from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball with each lower blade member 515, the closed state to the open state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening/closing ball entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball in the first receiving part, and changes to the closed state by receiving the game ball in the second receiving part. It was transitioning from a state to an open state. On the other hand, the opening/closing ball entry means includes, for example, a drive unit that sets the opening/closing ball entry means to either a closed state or an open state, and a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball. The drive unit may shift the opening/closing ball entry means from the open state to the closed state based on the detection of the entry of the ball. In short, the opening/closing ball entry means has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area is not allowed to enter, and an open state based on the entry of a game ball. It is only necessary to move from the state to the closed state.

Further, the croon 53 allows the game ball that has entered the croon 53 to enter the hole 533B, 533C (the first A hole 533A (second ball entry part) that allows the game ball that enters the croon 53 to enter, and shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. Department). This croon 53 has a rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball that has entered the croon 53, and a first ball entrance part and a second ball entrance part are provided on the rolling surface 531, and A game ball rolling on a moving surface 531 is entered.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53, and allow the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 531 to enter. . On the other hand, the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section are configured to, for example, distribute game balls that have entered the variable ball entering means to the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the probabilities of distributing game balls to the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section by the distribution mechanism may be the same or may be different. In short, the variable ball entry means only needs to include a first ball entry section and a second ball entry section.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A are the 16 round execution gates that start the execution of 16 round games. Further, each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games. Therefore, the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B, 533C. It gives value to players.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (four times in this embodiment) when a game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. A game in the opening/closing execution mode in which game balls can be paid out is started, and when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed more than a predetermined number of times (in the present embodiment). 16 times), a game in an opening/closing execution mode is started in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when a game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A can be performed by setting the number of openings and closings of the variable prize winning device 38, so that each hole 533B, 533C The player is given a higher value than the opening/closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the hole, but for example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, A higher value may be given to the player than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game ball. In short, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section is the same as the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is sufficient to provide the player with a higher value than the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the hole 533A is used as a 16-round execution gate that starts execution of 16 round games, and each hole 533B, 533C is used as a 4-round execution gate that starts execution of 4 round games, and each hole The correspondence between 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between each of the holes 533A to 533C and the 16th round execution gate and the 4th round execution gate does not have to be fixed; for example, the correspondence may be changed based on the results of an internal lottery. It's okay. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the gameplay and increase the attention of the players to the game.

FIGS. 7 and 8 are enlarged views of the vicinity of the non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIG. 7(A) and FIG. 8(A) are diagrams showing a state in which a game ball is falling toward the non-electric accessory 51 when the non-electric accessory 51 is in an open state. 7(B) and FIG. 8(B) are diagrams showing the subsequent flow of game balls.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a rotation distribution mechanism 51D provided at the upper left of the baffle plate 51A.
The rotation distribution mechanism 51D is formed at equal intervals around the rotation shaft 51D1 attached to the game board 31 so as to be rotatable around an axis perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 31, and around the rotation shaft 51D1. The rotating blade 51D2 includes three rotating blades 51D2 and a stopper 51D3 provided below the rotating shaft 51D1.

Among the three rotating blades 51D2, when the right rotating blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3, the upper rotating blade 51D2 becomes non-motorized as it goes upward, as shown in FIG. It is tilted so as to approach the accessory 51.
In this state, the game ball that has fallen through the left side of the windmill located on the upper right side of the rotation distribution mechanism 51D is transferred to the upper rotating blade 51D2 and the left rotating blade 51D2 among the three rotating blades 51D2. (See the arrow in FIG. 7(A)).

The game ball that fell between the upper rotating blade 51D2 and the left rotating blade 51D2 rotates the rotating shaft 51D1 counterclockwise via the rotating blade 51D2, as shown in FIG. 7(B). After that, the ball passes to the left of the non-electric accessory 51 without entering the non-electric accessory 51 (see the arrow in FIG. 7(B)). Of the three rotating blades 51D2, the left rotating blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. As a result, the rotating shaft 51D1 stops rotating. Note that the game ball that has passed on the left side of the non-electric accessory 51 will then enter the out port 39.

On the other hand, when the left rotating blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3, the upper rotating blade 51D2 among the three rotating blades 51D2 moves upward as shown in FIG. 8(A). It slopes away from the non-electric accessory 51 as it goes.
In this state, the game ball that has fallen through the left side of the windmill located on the upper right side of the rotation distribution mechanism 51D is transferred to the upper rotating blade 51D2 and the right rotating blade 51D2 among the three rotating blades 51D2. (See the arrow in FIG. 8(A)).

The game ball that fell between the upper rotating blade 51D2 and the right rotating blade 51D2 rotates the rotating shaft 51D1 clockwise via the rotating blade 51D2, as shown in FIG. 8(B). , the ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 (see arrow in FIG. 8(B)). Of the three rotating blades 51D2, the right rotating blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. As a result, the rotating shaft 51D1 stops rotating.

In this way, the rotation distribution mechanism 51D distributes the game balls falling toward the non-electric accessory 51 to the left and right according to its own rotation, and divides the game ball into a left route that does not allow the game ball to enter the non-electric accessory 51. It has a function of alternately switching between the right route and the right route in which the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it difficult for game balls that have fallen toward the non-motorized accessory 51 to enter the non-motorized accessory 51 against the player's intention, thereby This can be made easier to reflect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotational distribution mechanism 51D is provided only in the first stage, but a second stage rotational distribution mechanism 51D may be provided, and a third and subsequent stage rotational distribution mechanism 51D may be further provided. You can. According to this, it is possible to make it even more difficult for a game ball that has fallen toward the non-motorized accessory 51 to enter the non-motorized accessory 51 against the player's intention. This can be made easier to reflect.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the rotation distribution mechanism 51D distributes the game balls falling toward the non-electric accessory 51 to the left and right according to its own rotation, but the rotation distribution mechanism 51D distributes the game balls falling toward the non-electric accessory 51 to the left and right according to its own rotation. may be distributed.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device.
The display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three display areas as shown in FIG. Column Z3 is displayed. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 has eight types of symbols consisting of numbers "1" to "8" arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "1" follows "8". It is composed of In addition, in FIG. 10, the center line of each display area is shown by a dashed-dotted line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on winnings in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbols, a game repeat effect is executed on the display screen G. In this game replay, the display switches from a variable display to a static display in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line L. End with state.
That is, a game round refers to the period from when variable display starts on the main display section 45 and symbol display device 47 based on winnings to the respective operating ports 36 and 37 until a predetermined stop result is displayed.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 47 is not limited to this and is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the scrolling direction of each symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols in each symbol row may be a combination of pictures and numbers, or only pictures, instead of numbers only.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 11, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control that causes the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source and a power source that executes launch control that causes the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch game balls. A launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main control device 60 includes a board box that accommodates a main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a marking means that leaves a mark when opened, and may be provided with a marking structure that leaves a mark when opened. Specifically, the trace means includes a configuration in which a board box is constructed by combining multiple case bodies, and a joint part (crimped part) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when each case body is separated, and It is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing seal that leaves traces of peeling by leaving an adhesive layer on the object to be adhered to is pasted across the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies, etc. can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a nonvolatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain stored information. This ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be explained in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. It is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and a power reserve area 64c. These areas will be explained in detail later.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60, a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k, and a non-electric accessory opening detection sensor 519. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 65, a payout control device 70, and a sound emission control device 90. In addition, the output port of the MPU 62 is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation opening 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. It is connected to a blade member drive section 521c that opens and closes the plate 521a, a plate drive section 523c that opens and closes the plate 523a, the main display section 45, and the accessory display section 46.

Note that the main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric accessory open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open and close the big winning opening 38a. Further, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the blade member driving section 521c to open and close the blade member 521a. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the plate driving section 523c to open/close the plate 523a. Furthermore, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery conducted based on winnings to the respective operating ports 36 and 37. Furthermore, the MPU 62 controls the display of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery conducted based on the winnings in each through gate 41.

The power outage monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source/launch control device 80 that has the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage output from the power source/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power via the power outage monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 40a to 40k are used for the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, each through gate 41, and the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. The holes 533A to 533C of the croon 53 are provided in one-to-one correspondence. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40k, the MPU 62 determines whether the various winning openings, the out opening 39, each through gate 41, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and each hole 533A to 533C of the croon 53 will receive a prize. Judgment (ball entry judgment) is being made. Note that the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination at the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37.

The payout control device 70 executes payout control that causes the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (gaming balls lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) sent from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, etc., based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and operates the generated power. Supply electricity. Note that the power source/launch control device 80 includes a power source section for use during power outage, such as a backup capacitor. This power supply section for power outage supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 even in the event of a power outage in which the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Further, the power supply/launch control device 80 executes firing control to cause the game ball firing mechanism 81 to fire the game balls. Here, the game ball firing mechanism 81 includes a firing rail that extends toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the firing rail, and a ball feeding device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the firing rail. The solenoid is an electric actuator that fires the game balls supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34. The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid to cause the game ball to be fired when predetermined firing conditions are met.

<Electrical configuration for executing internal lottery in MPU 62 of main controller 60>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 12, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses a jackpot random number counter C1 for a lottery when a jackpot occurs, and when a jackpot occurs, uses a jackpot type counter C2 for a lottery for the type of jackpot, and draws a lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display. The reach random number counter C3 is used. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the fluctuation type counter CS to determine the display duration on the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 47. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory release counter C4 for a lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 should be brought into the electric role release state. Note that the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 11) of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated regularly, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. The received ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 11) provided as acquired information storage means is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 11). Furthermore, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is stored in the electric prize holding area 64c (see FIG. 11) of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters each through gate 41. be done.

The holding ball storage area 64b includes a holding area Ra for the first result display section, a holding area Rb for the second result display section, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 sets the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in each area Ra1 to Ra4 in chronological order according to the winning of the game ball to the upper operation opening 36. I will store it. Specifically, when winnings to the upper operating port 36 occur multiple times in succession, the MPU 62 stores the pending information in the order of first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4. Stored in chronological order.

In this way, since the first result display section holding area Ra includes four storage areas, up to four game balls can be held in the upper operating port 36. Further, the first result display section reservation area Ra includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4.
Note that the number of items to be held in the upper operating port 36 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be singular. It's okay.

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 sets the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in each area Rb1 to Rb4 in chronological order according to the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. I will store it. Specifically, when winnings to the lower operating port 37 occur multiple times in succession, the MPU 62 stores the reservation information in the order of first area Rb1 → second area Rb2 → third area Rb3 → fourth area Rb4. Stored in chronological order.

In this way, since the second result display section holding area Rb includes four storage areas, the winning of game balls to the lower operating port 37 can be held up to a maximum of four. Further, the second result display section reservation area Rb includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4.
It should be noted that the number of items to be held in the lower operating port 37 is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number. You can.

When starting the variable display of each result display section 45a, 45b, the execution area AE stores pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display section holding area Ra or the second result display section holding area Rb. This is an area for moving.

The electric role holding area 64c includes four storage areas like the first result display section holding area Ra and the second result display section holding area Rb. Therefore, the winning of game balls to each through gate 41 is suspended up to a maximum of four.
Note that the number of reservations related to each through gate 41 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, and may not be singular. You can.

<Detailed explanation of each counter>
The details of each counter will be explained below.
First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when a game ball enters each through gate 41. Ru.
Then, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower actuating port 37 should be brought into the electric role open state based on the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c. Execute the property opening lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequency with which a game ball can be won into the lower operation opening 37 is different from each other by setting the electric accessory 37a to an open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is relatively low, and a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is relatively low. It has a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

In the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role opening lottery is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, compared to the low-frequency support mode, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state when the electric role open state is won is greater, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The opening time for each time is also getting longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in one electric utility open state is shorter than the one opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode has a minimum amount of time secured as the waiting time between the end of the electric accessory lottery and the next electric accessory lottery. The duration of one fluctuating display on the object display section 46 has become shorter.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the lower operation opening 37 than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper operating port 36 than in the lower operating port 37. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will win in the lower operating port 37 is higher than that in the upper operating port 36.
Then, when it is detected that a prize has entered the lower operation port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls too much. It can be carried out.

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role-playing object opening lottery compared to the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, for example, multiple types of secured time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a short secured time compared to the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected secured times may be It may be configured to shorten. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the secured time, the high-frequency support mode can change the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low-frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high compared to .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . Moreover, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 similarly to the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is transferred to the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. is stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 36, and when the gaming ball enters the lower operating port 37. The result is stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the appropriate timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery (win/fail lottery) based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a win/fail table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the random number value for winning the jackpot is stored in a win/fail table in the win/fail table storage area 63a (see FIG. 11) of the ROM 63 provided as a win/fail information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (appropriate information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two win/fail lottery modes: a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a jackpot and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a jackpot. . In addition, the success/failure tables include the low probability mode win/fail table (low probability win/fail information group) shown in FIG. 13(a), and the high probability mode win/fail table (high probability win/fail information group) shown in FIG. 13(b). group).
The MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These win/fail tables have lottery results (win/fail results) for a plurality of jackpots, such as "big hit win,""special loser result," and "normal loser result."
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the winning/failure table for low probability mode is referred to when drawing a lottery to generate a jackpot, as shown in FIG. It is.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the high-probability mode win/fail table is referred to when drawing a jackpot to generate a jackpot, the number of random numbers that result in a "jackpot win" is 21, as shown in FIG. 13(b). It is. Here, the value of the random number that results in a jackpot win stored in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is included in the value of the random number that results in a "big win" stored in the win/fail table for the high probability mode.

Note that the value and number of random numbers stored in each win/fail table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a "big hit" than the low probability mode. In addition, the random number values that result in a "jackpot win" stored in the high probability mode win/fail table do not include the random number values that result in a "jackpot win" stored in the low probability mode win/fail table. It may also include a part of the random number value that is a "big hit" stored in the win/fail table for the low probability mode.

Furthermore, in each win/fail lottery mode, if the random number value does not result in a "big hit", the result is a loss without winning the jackpot.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of winning results: "special winning results (small winning results)" and "normal winning results." These lose results have in common that they do not trigger a transition to the win/fail lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special failure result" is a trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal failure result" is not a trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. For example, the jackpot type counter C2 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and the updated value is transferred to the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. is stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 36, and when the gaming ball enters the lower operating port 37. The result is stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the appropriate timing.
Then, when a jackpot occurs, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (allocation lottery) for the jackpot type based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a distribution table that stores random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types.
As shown in FIG. 14, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the type of jackpot is stored in the distribution table (distribution table) in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 11) of the ROM 63 provided as distribution information group storage means. information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 14(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 14(b). ing.
The MPU 62 performs a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been shifted from the first result display holding area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winnings to the upper operation opening 36. This table is referred to when performing a jackpot type lottery.
As shown in FIG. 14(a), the first distribution table includes "low probability results (special distribution results corresponding to low probability)", "high probability results for non-disclosed small rounds (latent high probability results corresponding to small rounds)" ), ``Explicit low round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round)'', and ``Most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)'' are the allocation destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 14" are distributed to "unspecified low results". ``15 to 19'' are classified as ``highly certain round results,'' and ``20 to 29'' are classified as ``most favorable results.''

The second distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the holding area Rb for the second result display section to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation opening 37. This is a table that is referred to when performing a jackpot type lottery.
As shown in FIG. 14(b), the second distribution table has two distribution results, "low probability result" and "most advantageous result", as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 29" are distributed to "most advantageous results". ”.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends (2) Support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference in the winning/failure lottery mode (1) will be explained.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning/losing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low probability mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.
"Highly accurate result of few unspecified rounds", "Highly certain result of few explicitly stated rounds", and "Most advantageous result" have a high probability of winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high probability mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

Next, the difference in support modes (2) will be explained.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the number of games played reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

The "highly accurate result of a small number of unspecified rounds" is a distribution result that maintains the support mode as it was before the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the win/fail lottery.
The "highly accurate result with few rounds" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

Note that the difference in the manner of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. .
The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. is stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 36, and when the gaming ball enters the lower operating port 37. The result is stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the appropriate timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display (a reach occurrence lottery) based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when a winning lottery results in a ``normal result'' without a ``big hit winning'' result.
Specifically, when the winning/failure lottery does not result in a "big hit" but instead results in a "normally unsuccessful result," the MPU 62 uses the reach table and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. By comparing the above, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a reach display, and if it is decided to generate a reach display in this lottery, a reach display is generated. The reach table is a table that stores random number values related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 (see FIG. 11).

Here, if the winning lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution lottery results in the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 47 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. A combination of symbols having numbers of is stopped and displayed on the active line L. In addition, if the winning lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution lottery results in a "low-probability result," the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result. is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In addition, if you win a jackpot in a lottery and are sorted into a ``non-disclosed small round high probability result'' or ``a clear small round high probability result'' in a distribution lottery, or if you win a ``big hit'' in a lottery. If the result is a "special winning result" without any difference, the symbol display device 47 selects as a stop result not a combination of symbols having the same numbers, but a "normal winning result" in the lottery. A special combination of symbols having mutually different numbers that will never be displayed is stopped and displayed on an active line L.

Reach display is when a combination of symbols with the same number is finally displayed in a fixed manner (a ``big hit'' in a winning/failure lottery, which is sorted into a ``most advantageous result'' or a ``low probability result'' in a distribution lottery). ), this occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display can be used when a special combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed (when it becomes a "big hit" in the winning/failure lottery, and "non-disclosed low round high accuracy result" or "explicit low round high result" in the distribution lottery. In the case where the winning result is sorted into a "certain result" or when the winning lottery results in a "special losing result" without becoming a "big hit winning"), it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The reach display mode is such that some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (for example, symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) are placed on the active line L. By displaying the symbols in a stopped state, a combination of the same symbols is displayed to suggest a stopping result, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, by generating the reach display, the pachinko machine 10 starts the variable display on the symbol display device 47, but before displaying the predetermined stop result, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "big hit" in the winning lottery. It is possible to make the players expect that they have been sorted into the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" in the sorting lottery.

Note that the mode of reach display is not limited to this, and some symbol rows may be stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows may be displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, predetermined characters or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image after each symbol row is displayed in a reduced size or hidden.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected performance as a type of variable display on the symbol display device 47. The expected presentation is such that after the fluctuating display starts on the symbol display device 47 but before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the player is made to expect that he or she has won a "big hit" in the lottery. Refers to performance. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected performances: the above-mentioned ready-to-reach display and a preview display.

The preview display will be displayed in the event that you win a jackpot in a lottery, or if you do not win a jackpot in a lottery and get a special negative result, you will not win a jackpot in a lottery. This is an expected performance that makes the performance more likely to occur than in the case of an "out-of-normal result." Instead of making effects more likely to occur, this preview display may make it easier to select effects with a low appearance rate, or a combination of these may be used.
Note that while the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display was executed by the main controller 60, the lottery to determine whether to generate a preview display is executed by the audio light emission control device 90. .

The preview display mode is such that among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner. In a situation where symbol row Z1) is stopped and displayed on the active line L and multiple symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are displayed in a variable manner, or a reach display is generated, a predetermined character etc. is displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This preview display occurs both when the reach display occurs and when the reach display does not occur, but it is set so that it occurs more often when the reach display occurs than when the reach display does not occur. has been done.
Note that the preview display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed and the form of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the variation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the variation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 198. .
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process is executed, which will be described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the symbol display duration time on the main display section 45 and the symbol display duration time on the symbol display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. Note that these display duration times will be explained in detail later.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advance the game, and main processing that is activated upon power-on. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be explained in order.
Note that, in addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S101 to S106 (for example, every 2 msec), as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes a process of reading the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k, determines the states, and stores the results in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to the various winning holes have detected winning of game balls, the MPU 62 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of prize balls, and The command is sent to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected winning of game balls, the MPU 62 issues a prize ball command to instruct 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number. is transmitted to the payout control device 70.
Note that the payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to execute payout of prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

Further, in step S101, the MPU 62 executes a process of reading the non-electric accessory opening detection sensor 519. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the state of the non-motorized accessory release detection sensor 519, determines the state, and stores it in the RAM 64 as non-motorized accessory release information. When the MPU 62 determines that the non-motorized accessory opening detection sensor 519 has detected the release of the non-motorized accessory 51, the MPU 62 executes a predetermined process. This predetermined processing will be explained in detail later.

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. Note that if the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, respectively, and updates them. The latter value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Note that, if the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of each counter C1 to C4, the MPU 62 returns the value of each counter C1 to C4 to 0 and clears it.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a through winning process. In this winning process for through, if it is determined that the detection sensor 40g corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103. The value of is stored in the power reserve area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third hold lamp section 49c, and transmits the set command to the audio light emission control device 90.
Note that the audio light emission control device 90 lights up the third hold lamp section 49c based on a command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won in the through gate 41 is 4, as described above, and the third reserved lamp section 49c lights up by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes winning processing for the round game execution gate.
The winning process for the round game execution gate will be described in detail below.

<Winning processing for round game execution gate>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for the round game execution gate.
In the winning process for the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S204, as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 executes 16 rounds by determining whether or not the detection sensors 40f and 40i corresponding to the 16 round execution gate (non-electric accessory 51 and hole 533A) detect the entry of a game ball. It is determined whether a game ball has entered the gate.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has entered the 16th round execution gate, it sets a 16th round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S202. This 16th round execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the 16th round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that no game ball has entered the 16th round execution gate, in step S203, the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has not entered the 16th round execution gate By determining whether the detection sensors 40j, 40k have detected the entry of a game ball, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the fourth round execution gate.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has entered the 4th round execution gate, it sets a 4th round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S204. This 4th round execution flag is a flag for specifying that the ball has entered the 4th round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the 4th round execution gate, the MPU 62 does not execute the process from step S204 onward, and instead enters the winning ball for the round game execution gate. Finish the process.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt processing, the processing from step S106 onwards will be explained with reference to FIG.
In step S106, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the operating port.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the operating port will be explained in detail.

<Winning process for actuation port>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S307, as shown in FIG.

In step S301, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 36 (starting winning) by determining whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper operating port 36 has detected a winning of a game ball. Determine whether When the MPU 62 determines in step S301 that a game ball has entered the upper operating port 36, in step S302, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display reservation area Ra, and displays the reserved number. The number is set as the first start hold storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the hold area Ra for the first result display section. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S305 onwards.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S301 that no game ball has won in the upper operating port 36, in step S303, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 detects that the game ball has won a prize. By determining whether or not is detected, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the lower operation opening 37.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S303 that no game ball has won in the lower operating port 37, it ends the winning process for the operating port. Furthermore, when the MPU 62 determines in step S303 that a game ball has entered the lower operating port 37, in step S304, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reserved balls stored in the second result display reservation area Rb, The number of pending items is set as the second starting pending storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the second result display section holding area Rb. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S305 onwards.

After executing the process of step S302 or step S304, the MPU 62 determines in step S305 that the number of start pending memories N (RaN or RbN) set in step S302 or step S304 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether it exists or not.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S305 that the starting pending memory number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Furthermore, if the MPU 62 determines in step S305 that the number N of start pending memories is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 updates the start pending memory number N by adding 1 to the value in step S306.

In step S307, the MPU 62 stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the free storage area of the result display section holding area. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start suspension storage number N updated in step S306.

For example, when the first start pending storage number RaN is set in step S302, the MPU 62 sets each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first result display section holding area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S306. For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN to "3" in step S302, the MPU 62 sets the memory area corresponding to "4" of the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S306. Pending information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S304, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. A set of each value is stored as pending information in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second result display section holding area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start pending storage number RbN updated in step S306. do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN to "3" in step S304, the MPU 62 sets the memory area corresponding to "4" of the second start pending memory number RbN updated in step S306. Pending information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S307, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the first holding lamp section 49a or the second holding lamp section 49b, and transmits the set command to the audio emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the actuation port.
Note that the audio emission control device 90 lights up the first hold lamp section 49a or the second hold lamp section 49b based on a command sent from the MPU 62. In addition, the maximum number of game balls that have entered the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 can be held at a maximum of 4, as described above, and the first holding lamp section 49a or the second holding lamp section 49b can hold this number of holding balls. The corresponding number lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S414, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S401 to S409 at a 4 msec cycle, repeatedly executes steps S408 to S411 when the remaining time occurs, and executes steps S412 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S408. Execute.

In step S401, the MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting the command set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize ball command has been set, and if it is determined that a prize ball command has been set, the MPU 62 transmits the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether a command for performance, such as a command corresponding to a performance for a game round or a command corresponding to a performance for an opening/closing execution mode, is set, and the command for performance is set. If it is determined that it has been set, a command for the effect is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90.

In step S402, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the variation type counter CS by adding 1, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . Note that if the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the MPU 62 returns the value of the variation type counter CS to 0 and clears it.

In step S403, the MPU 62 executes a game round control process for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery and a distribution lottery, and also determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 47, and determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45. Decide on information related to etc.
In step S404, the MPU 62 executes a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each gaming state such as opening/closing execution mode, high probability mode, and high frequency support mode.
Note that the gaming cycle control process in step S403 and the gaming state transition process in step S404 will be explained in detail later.

In step S405, the MPU 62 executes a demonstration display execution determination process. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether a predetermined start waiting period for starting a demonstration (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. However, if it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demonstration command for starting demonstration display is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90.
Note that the audio emission control device 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command sent from the MPU 62.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S405 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 seconds and the interval at which the process of step S405 is repeatedly executed is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S405 is executed and when it reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period starts. It is determined that the period has passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary; for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Furthermore, if a new game round is started while counting the number of executions of the process in step S405, the MPU 62 resets the count value.

In step S406, the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for controlling the drive of the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operating port 37. In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes an electric role-playing object release lottery based on the value of the electric role-playing object release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and also performs an electric role-playing object opening lottery. If the winner is selected, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 controls the display of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

In step S407, the MPU 62 executes a game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 62 causes the power source/launch control device 80 to execute launch control to launch the game ball based on the player's rotating operation of the launch handle 27. Specifically, the power supply/launch control device 80 causes the game ball firing mechanism 81 to fire the game ball by energizing the solenoid of the game ball firing mechanism 81 at a predetermined period (0.6 seconds in this embodiment). . Note that the solenoid is excited so as to fire the game ball with a firing intensity that corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 27. Further, the power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball firing mechanism 81 to fire the game ball when predetermined firing conditions are met.

In step S408, the MPU 62 determines whether a power outage flag is set in a power outage flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 . The power outage monitoring board 65 outputs this power outage signal when it is confirmed that a power outage has occurred. Note that this power outage flag is cleared when the next main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by assigning 1 to a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears the various flags by assigning 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by assigning 1 to the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power outage flag by assigning 0 to the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S408 that the power outage flag is set, it executes the power outage processing from step S412 onwards, without executing the processing from step S409 onwards. Specifically, in step S412, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S413, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM judgment value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S414, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 continues an infinite loop until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S408 that the power outage flag is not set, it determines in step S409 whether or not the timing to execute the next normal process has come, that is, the current normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S409 that the timing to execute the next normal process has not yet arrived, that is, if the remaining time has occurred, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S410, and updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S411. In this step, the variation type counter CS is updated. Note that the MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S408 to S411 until it determines in step S409 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S409 that it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, if there is no remaining time, the MPU 62 executes step S401 again to perform the next normal process. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S512, as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 executes startup processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the audio emission control device 90) to become operational. ) has elapsed.

In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. If the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that 1 sec has not elapsed, it repeatedly executes the process in step S502. Furthermore, if the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that 1 sec has elapsed, it executes the processes from step S503 onwards.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S502 is executed. For example, if the interval at which the process in step S502 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process in step S502 is executed and determines that 1 sec has passed when the count reaches 10,000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission/prohibition period is arbitrary; for example, the permission/prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S503, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S504, the MPU 62 determines whether a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power supply/launch control device 80 is turned on.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S504 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, it executes the processes from step S509 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S504 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S505 whether a power outage flag is set in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S505 that the power outage flag is not set, it executes the processes from step S509 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S505 that the power outage flag is set, it calculates a RAM determination value in step S506.
In step S507, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated in step S506 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM judgment value calculated in step S506 with the RAM judgment value saved in step S413 (processing during power outage) of normal processing, and if they match, , it is determined that the RAM determination value is normal, and if they do not match, it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S507 that the RAM determination value is not normal, it executes the processes from step S509 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S507 that the RAM determination value is normal, it clears the power outage flag stored in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S508.

Note that the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM judgment value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining in the main process whether this keyword has been written normally.

As described above, if the MPU 62 determines in step S504 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, if it determines in step S505 that the power outage flag is not set, or in step S507, the MPU 62 erases the RAM determination value. If it is determined that it is not normal, the processes from step S509 onwards are executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S509, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S510.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the gaming parlor can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch when the gaming parlor starts operating. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power outage is not confirmed on the power outage monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S508 or step S510, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (control board of the audio emission control device 90, etc.) in step S511, and in step S512, the MPU 62 sends a timer interrupt Allow the process to occur and proceed to the normal process described above.
Note that by receiving the initial command sent in step S511, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is being performed normally, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game time control processing>
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game time control process.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S609, as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 ends the game cycle control process without executing the processes after step S602. Therefore, when it is determined that the MPU 62 is in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 does not start the game round regardless of whether or not it detects that a game ball enters each operating port 36, 37.
Note that the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S601 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S602 whether or not the main display section 45 is in the variable display mode, that is, whether the game round is in progress. Determine whether or not.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S602 that the main display section 45 is not in the variable display mode, it executes the game round start processing in steps S603 to S605.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S602 that the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display, it executes the game progress processing of steps S606 to S609.

First, the processing for starting the game round in steps S603 to S605 will be explained.
In step S603, the MPU 62 grasps the number of pending items stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display section and the number of pending items stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display section, and sets these pending numbers. It is determined whether the total number CRN is less than or equal to "0". If the MPU 62 determines in step S603 that the total number CRN is "0" or less, it ends the game time control process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S603 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S604, the MPU 62 determines that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S604, A data setting process is executed to set the hold information stored in Rb for use in the game round. Thereafter, in step S605, the MPU 62 executes a variation start process for starting a variable display on the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 47 to complete the game cycle, and ends the game cycle control process.
The data setting process in step S604 and the variation start process in step S605 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S711, as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start pending storage number RbN of the second result display section holding area Rb set in step S304 of the winning process for the actuation opening is "0" or less. do. If the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second start pending storage number RbN is "0" or less, it executes the data setting process for the first result display section in steps S702 to S706, and returns to step S701. If it is determined that the second start pending storage number RbN is not less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S707 to S711 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes a data setting process for the first result display section that sets the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for use in a game round, and a data setting process for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section that sets the reservation information stored in the storage reservation area Rb for use in the game round.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 displays the second result display section without executing the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of a game ball to the lower operation port 37, the MPU 62 does not display the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb. Based on the winning of the game ball, the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section is played preferentially regardless of whether there is reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section. Set for one-time digestion.

First, the data setting process for the first result display section in steps S702 to S706 will be explained.
In step S702, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display section pending area Ra to update it.
In step S703, the MPU 62 moves the reservation information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display section reservation area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S704, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process to shift the reservation information stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the reservation information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the reservation information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the reservation information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3.

In step S705, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag stored in the RAM 64. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which of the main display sections 45, the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b, starts variable display when a game round is completed. It is. In this step S705, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so when the game round ends, a variable display is displayed on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation opening 36. This indicates that the

In step S706, the MPU 62 sets a shift command to recognize that the pending information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the audio emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift is a sound emission control device that indicates that the shift of the pending information has been executed for the pending information stored in the first result display section holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Contains information for recognition by the computer 90.
Note that the audio emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp section 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of lit game balls of the first holding lamp section 49a as the number of game balls that are held in the upper operating port 36 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display section in steps S707 to S711 will be explained.
In step S707, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display section pending area Rb to update it.
In step S708, the MPU 62 moves the reservation information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display section reservation area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S709, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process to shift the reservation information stored in the storage area of the second result display section reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reservation information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the reservation information in the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the reservation information in the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the reservation information in the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb2. Shift to area Rb3.

In step S710, the MPU 62 sets a second result display section flag in the RAM 64. In this step S710, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so when the game round ends, a variable display is displayed on the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. This indicates that the

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a shift command to recognize that the pending information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the audio emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift is a sound emission control device that indicates that the shift of the pending information has been executed for the pending information stored in the second result display section holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. Contains information for recognition by the computer 90.
Note that the audio emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp section 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of lit game balls in the second holding lamp section 49b as the number of game balls held in the lower operating port 37 decreases.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the variation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S818, as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the win/fail lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the MPU 62 stores the win/fail table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 13(a)) from the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S802. If it is determined in step S801 that the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/fail table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 13(b)) is read from the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S803. read out.

After executing the process in step S802 or step S803, the MPU 62 executes a validity determination process in step S804. In this win/fail determination process, the MPU 62 determines the result of the win/fail lottery (win/fail result) by comparing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the win/fail table read out in step S802 or step S803. Determine. As mentioned above, the winning/failure result is one of "jackpot winning", "special winning result", and "normal winning result", and even if the winning/failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is not the high probability mode. The same applies.

In step S805, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result determined in step S804 is a "big hit". If the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the result is a "big hit", it executes the processes from step S806 onwards, and if it determines in step S805 that the result is not a "big hit", it executes the process. , executes the processing from step S812 onwards.

First, the process (processing after step S806) when the MPU 62 determines that the win/fail result is a "big hit" in step S805 will be described.
In step S806, the MPU 62 determines whether the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, it starts a variable display on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Therefore, in step S807, the first distribution table (see FIG. 14(a)) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S806, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 Since this indicates that the variable display is to be started in step S808, the second distribution table (see FIG. 14(b)) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

After executing the process in step S807 or step S808, the MPU 62 executes a distribution determination process in step S809. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S807 or step S808, thereby determining the result of the distribution lottery ( Judging the distribution result).

In step S810, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S809 the information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45. It is determined according to the distribution result, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S809 with the stop result table for jackpot results stored in advance in the ROM 63. Determine such information. This stop result table for jackpot results defines the mode of the picture to be stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 in a different manner for each sorting result.

In step S811, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S809. Specifically, when the MPU 62 identifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag, and specifies that the result is a "high probability result for an undisclosed small round". In this case, set the unstated low round high probability result flag, and if it is specified that the result is an "explicit low round high probability result", set the explicit low round high probability result flag, and select the "best result". If it is determined that this is the case, the most advantageous result flag is set. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S816 onwards.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (processing after step S812) when the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the win/fail result is not a "big hit win" will be described.
In step S812, the MPU 62 determines whether the success or failure result determined in step S804 is a "special failure result."
If the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the result is a "specially unsuccessful result," it executes the processes from step S813 onwards, and if it determines in step S812 that the result is not a "specially unsuccessful result" In this case, the process from step S815 onwards is executed.

In step S813, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for a special off result. In this stop result setting process for special missing results, the MPU 62 determines information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special winning result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The pattern of the symbols set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the pattern of the symbols set in the stop result table for the jackpot result.
In step S814, the MPU 62 sets a special failure flag in the RAM 64.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 refers to this special lose flag to determine whether the win/fail result is a "special lose result."

On the other hand, in step S815, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for a normal result. In this stop result setting process for normal outlier results, the MPU 62 determines information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 by referring to a stop result table for normal out-of-order results stored in the ROM 63 in advance. The mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the normal winning result is different from the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special lose result.

After executing any one of steps S811, S814, and S815, the MPU 62 executes a display duration setting process (display duration period) in step S816.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

In addition, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a ready-to-reach display occurs on the symbol display device 47. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines that if the sorting result determined in step S809 is a "low probability result" or "most advantageous result," and if the correctness result determined in step S804 is a "normally unsuccessful result." In addition, when winning the reach occurrence lottery, it is determined that the reach display will occur. In addition, as mentioned above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Execute the reach occurrence lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines that a ready-to-reach display will occur, the MPU 62 displays the variation type counter acquired from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the display continuation time table for ready-to-reach occurrence stored in the ready-to-reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. The display duration time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration time is set in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the display duration table for non-reach display stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and uses the variable type counter The display duration time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display duration time is set in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Specifically, the display duration table for non-reach occurrence is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of pending items increases. Therefore, the display duration time when the pending information related to the upper operating port 36 is consumed is set to become shorter as the number of pending information related to the upper operating port 36 increases. The display duration time when the pending information related to the lower operating port 37 is consumed is set to become shorter as the number of pending information related to the lower operating port 37 increases. Furthermore, the display duration table for non-reach occurrence is set so that when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the display duration is shorter than when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of pending items is the same, the display duration in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for reach occurrence is different from the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for non-reach occurrence.

Note that the display duration table for non-reach occurrence may be set in a relationship opposite to the above-mentioned relationship, such as the longer the display duration becomes as the number of items on hold increases, depending on the number of items on hold and the support mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it does not change. Further, display duration tables may be set individually for each of the success/failure results and the sorting results.

In step S817, the MPU 62 sets a variation command and a type command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the variation command and type command set in step S817 to the audio emission control device 90.
Note that the audio emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be explained in detail later.

The variation command includes information regarding the display duration time. Further, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not a reach display occurs.
Here, as mentioned above, the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for reach occurrence and the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for non-reach occurrence are mutually exclusive. It's different.
Therefore, even if information regarding whether or not the ready-to-reach display occurs is not included in the variation command, the ready-to-reach display is performed by the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information regarding the display duration. It is possible to determine whether or not this occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information on whether or not the reach display occurs. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether the reach display occurs or not.

The type command includes information regarding the validity result. In other words, the type command includes information related to "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result" as information related to the win/fail result. Further, the type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the distribution results such as "low probability result", "unspecified low round high probability result", "explicit low round high probability result", and "most advantageous result". Contains information.
In addition, in the following explanation, the win/fail result and the distribution result will be collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command includes information related to game results.

In step S818, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first result display section flag is displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation opening 36 when the game round ends. Since this indicates that the result display section 45a is to start variable display, the first result display section 45a is caused to start variable display.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the second Since this indicates that the result display section 45b is to start variable display, the second result display section 45b is caused to start variable display.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process, the game round progression process of steps S606 to S609 will be explained with reference to FIG.
In step S602, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display, and if it is determined that the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display, the MPU 62 displays the information for game progress in steps S606 to S609. Execute processing.

In step S606, the MPU 62 determines whether the display duration time set in step S816 of the variation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether the value set in the display duration counter in the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. Note that the value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S606 that the display duration time has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes a variable display process in step S607. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 45 during the variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game time control process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S606 that the display duration time has elapsed, it executes a variation end process in step S608. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 so that the main display section 45, which is currently being displayed in a variable manner, displays a pattern corresponding to the specified information.

Here, the picture finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs depending on the type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game parlor or the like can check the game results by visually checking the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, game hall managers and the like can easily check whether fraudulent activity is being carried out, such as trying to make the pachinko machine 10 perform the same behavior as if it had won a jackpot lottery. It can be done in a specific manner.
In addition, the main display section 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 are the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for players to recognize. Therefore, at the end of a game round, the player checks the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display section 45 to determine whether or not he or she has won a jackpot. The degree of attention to screen G can be increased.

In step S609, the MPU 62 sets a variation end command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the variation end command set in step S609 to the audio emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game time control process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the performance of the game round based on the fluctuation end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the production of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the gaming state transition process.
In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S914, as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes from step S902 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes from step S911 onwards.

First, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined in step S901 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. If the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended, in step S903, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result corresponds to transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Determine whether Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether the win/fail result is a "big hit win" or a "special loss result."

When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the result corresponds to transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets an in-opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processes from step S904 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if the MPU 62 determines that the win/fail result is a "normal lose result"), the game End the state transition process.

In step S904, the MPU 62 determines whether the win/fail result is a "special lose result" or not.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the pass/fail result is a "special pass/fail result", in step S905 it sets "2" to the opening/closing counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter for the MPU 62 to specify the total number of times that the big prize opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the win/fail result is not a "special winning result", that is, if it determines that the win/fail result is a "big hit win", the MPU 62 determines the distribution result in step S906. It is determined whether or not is a high-certainty result for a few rounds (“an unspecified high-certainty result for a few rounds” or “an explicit high-certainty result for a few rounds”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is a small round high certainty result, in step S907 it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "2". Further, if the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is not a high probability result for a few rounds, that is, if it determines that the distribution result is a "low probability result" or "most advantageous result", the MPU 62 In S908, a round number setting process is executed. In this round number setting process, the MPU 62 sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "4" or "16". This round counter RC is a counter for the MPU 62 to specify the number of round games when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the round number setting process.
In the round number setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1012, as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flags (4 round execution flag and 16 round execution flag) stored in the RAM 64.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether the non-motorized accessory 51 is being opened by determining whether the non-motorized accessory opening detection sensor 519 has detected the opening of the non-motorized accessory 51. do.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not being opened, it sets a non-opening command in step S1003. In step S401 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the non-release command set in step S1003 to the audio emission control device 90.
Note that the audio light emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the non-release command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be explained in detail later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened, it sets an opening command in step S1004. In step S401 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S1004 to the audio emission control device 90.
Note that the audio light emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be explained in detail later.

After executing the process in step S1003 or step S1004, the MPU 62 executes a croon route setting process in step S1005. In this Kroon route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the Kroon route.

In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether a round game execution flag (4 round execution flag or 16 round execution flag) is set in the RAM 64. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the round game execution gate (4th round execution gate or 16th round execution gate) after executing the closing route setting process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, it executes step S1006 again.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, it determines in step S1007 whether or not the 4-round execution flag is set in the RAM 64. .

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that the 4-round execution flag is set in the RAM 64, it sets "4" in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1008.
In step S1009, the MPU 62 sets a 4-round execution command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the 4-round execution command set in step S1009 to the audio emission control device 90.
Note that the audio emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the 4-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be explained in detail later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that the 4-round execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 (if it determines that the 16-round execution flag is set in the RAM 64), the MPU 62 proceeds to step S1010. , "16" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1011, the MPU 62 sets a 16-round execution command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the 16-round execution command set in step S1011 to the audio emission control device 90.
Note that the audio emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the 16-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be explained in detail later.

After executing the process in step S1009 or step S1011, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route. After that, the MPU 62 ends the round number setting process.

In this way, after setting the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the croon route, the MPU 62 sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the croon route based on the game ball entering the round game execution gate (4th round execution gate or 16th round execution gate). Since the mechanism 52 is set to the ejection route, the croon 53 may allow a plurality of game balls to enter depending on the timing of setting the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route. In this case, the MPU 62 sets the number of round games based on the round game execution gate where one of the game balls enters first, so that the player's game It is possible to improve the attention level of
In addition, in this embodiment, the croon 53 is configured so that a plurality of game balls may enter the ball, but it may be configured so that a plurality of game balls may not enter the ball.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with different termination conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two opening/closing execution modes: a round number regulation mode to which the game transitions when the win/fail result is a "big hit", and a round number regulation mode to which the game transitions when the win/fail result is a "special winning result". It has a standard mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that the grand prize opening 38a has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the grand prize opening 38a. Here, the total number of times the big winning opening 38a is opened and closed corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

Note that the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the big prize opening 38a once for each round game. Further, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying either of the following two conditions.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration period) has elapsed (2) The total number of winning game balls into the grand prize opening 38a has reached the predetermined upper limit number.

Returning to the explanation of the gaming state transition process, the processes after step S909 will be explained with reference to FIG.
After executing any one of the processes in step S905, step S907, and step S908, the MPU 62, in step S909, sets the opening waiting time (standby period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. Note that the waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In this way, if the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result corresponds to transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening in the timer counter T regardless of the type of game result. set. In other words, the opening waiting time is the same regardless of the type of game result.
Note that the waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, for example, to the extent that it is recognized as the same by the player. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening may differ greatly depending on the game result of "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" and the case of other game results. It is also possible to have a configuration that varies greatly depending on the type.

In step S910, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the opening command includes information regarding the number of round games when the game result is a "low probability result" or "most advantageous result". In step S401 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S910 to the audio emission control device 90.
Note that the audio light emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command sent from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be explained in detail later.

Next, a description will be given of the processing (processing after step S911) when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
In step S911, the MPU 62 executes a grand prize opening opening/closing process.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the grand prize opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1124 as shown in FIG. 25.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big prize opening 38a is open.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the big prize opening 38a is not open, it executes the processes from step S1102 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the big prize opening 38a is open, it executes the processes from step S1106 onwards.

First, in step S1101, the process (processing after step S1102) when the MPU 62 determines that the big winning hole 38a is not open will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is less than or equal to "0" and the value of the round counter RC is less than or equal to "0".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that at least one of the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T in step S1103. Determine whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the value of the timer counter T is not less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to "0", the MPU 62 executes a big winning opening opening process in step S1104.
Hereinafter, the big prize opening opening process in step S1104 will be explained in detail.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1207, as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether the win/fail result is a "special lose result" or not.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the win/fail result is a "special losing result", in step S1202, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and then returns to step S1202. In S1203, timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 seconds.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the win/fail result is not a "special losing result", in step S1204 the MPU 62 sets the winning counter PC to "8", and in step S1205, the distribution result It is determined whether or not is a high-certainty result for a few rounds (“an unspecified high-certainty result for a few rounds” or “an explicit high-certainty result for a few rounds”).

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is a small round high certainty result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1203 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is not a high-precision result for a few rounds, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1206. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1203 or step S1206, the MPU 62 executes the process of opening the big prize opening 38a in step S1207. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state by executing drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

Note that the value set in the winning counter PC in step S1202 or step S1204 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls that enter the big winning hole 38a.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1203 or step S1206 defines the upper limit duration time after the door 38b is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two different upper limit duration times by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 62 operates in a long-term mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and in a short-term mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-term mode. aspect) are set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball firing mechanism 81 to fire the game balls by exciting the solenoid of the game ball firing mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 seconds. Furthermore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning hole 38a to 8 by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls to the big winning hole 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls It is easy to enter the prize into the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls into the big prize opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing period of the game balls (shorter than the period), it is difficult to make the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. In addition, depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the grand prize opening 38a.

Returning to the explanation of the grand prize opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S1105 will be explained with reference to FIG. 25.
After executing the big prize opening opening process in step S1104, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1105. Furthermore, in step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1105 to the audio emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the audio emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state based on the opening command sent from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the process (processing after step S1106) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the big prize opening 38a is open will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to "0". That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1203 or step S1206 of the big winning opening opening process has elapsed.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is not less than "0", it executes the processes from step S1107 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, it executes the processes from step S1118 onwards.

First, a description will be given of the processing (processing after step S1107) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0".
In step S1107, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the big winning opening 38a. Note that the determination as to whether or not a winning has occurred in the big winning hole 38a is performed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the big winning hole 38a.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 that no winning has occurred in the big winning hole 38a, it ends the big winning hole opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 that a winning has occurred in the big winning opening 38a, in step S1108, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning counter PC and updates it.

In step S1109, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the winning counter PC is less than or equal to "0".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1109 that the value of the winning counter PC is not less than "0", it ends the big winning opening/closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1109 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, it executes a closing execution process in step S1110. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state by executing drive control of the variable prize winning drive section 38c.

In step S1111, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1111 to the audio emission control device 90.
Note that the audio emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1112, the MPU 62 determines whether the win/fail result is a "special lose result" or not.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that the win/fail result is a "specially wrong result", it executes the processes from step S1123 to be described later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that the win/fail result is not a "specially wrong result", it executes the processes from step S1113 onwards.
In step S1113, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1114, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1114 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1115. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1115 is the opening standby period from when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, to the closing state again, and until the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state again. It stipulates the time. In addition, in this embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This opening waiting time is the same regardless of the type or progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1114 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, it executes the processes from step S1116 onwards.
In step S1116, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (standby period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

Similar to the waiting time for the opening, the waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, for example, to the extent that it is recognized as the same by the player. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending may differ greatly depending on the game result of "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" and the case of a game result other than these. It is also possible to have a configuration that varies greatly depending on the type.

In step S1117, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. This ending command includes information as to whether or not the non-electric accessory 51 is open. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether the non-motorized accessory 51 is being opened by determining whether the non-motorized accessory opening detection sensor 519 has detected the opening of the non-motorized accessory 51. This information is included in the ending command. In step S401 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1117 to the audio emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the audio light emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, a process (processing after step S1118) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to "0" will be described.
In step S1118, the MPU 62 executes a closing execution process similarly to step S1110 described above.
In step S1119, the MPU 62 sets a closing command similarly to step S1111 described above.

In step S1120, the MPU 62 determines whether the win/fail result is a "special lose result" or not.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1120 that the win/fail result is not a "special loss result", that is, if it determines that the win/fail result is a "big hit win", it executes the processes from step S1121 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1120 that the win/fail result is a "special failure result", it executes the processes from step S1123 onwards.

First, a process (processing after step S1121) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1120 that the win/fail result is not a "specially wrong result" will be described.
In step S1121, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1122, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is less than or equal to "0".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1122 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it executes the processes from step S1115 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1122 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, it executes the processes from S1116 described above.

Next, a process (processing after step S1123) when the MPU 62 determines that the win/fail result is a "special failure result" in step S1112 or step S1120 will be described.
In step S1123, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening/closing counter SOC to update it.

In step S1124, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is less than or equal to "0".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1124 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not less than "0", it executes the processes from step S1115 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1124 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less, it executes the processes from S1116 described above.

Returning to the explanation of the gaming state transition processing, the processing after step S912 will be explained with reference to FIG.
After executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in step S911, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less in step S912. judge.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that at least one of the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less in step S913. 0" or less.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is not less than "0", it ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S914, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64, Execute the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends. After that, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1312, as shown in FIG. 27.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "clearly fewer rounds with a higher probability result."

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or "clearly less round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1302 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "clearly less round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1305 onwards.

First, the processing (processing after step S1302) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "clearly less round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1302, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high-frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high-frequency support mode.

In step S1303, the MPU 62 clears the number of times limit flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

In step S1304, the MPU 62 sets a high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. If the high probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, when ending the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 uses the flags (low certainty result flag, non-indication low round high accuracy result flag, explicit low round high Clear the most likely result flag, most favorable result flag) and special outlier flag. In addition, in step S801 of the above-mentioned fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 determines whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64. There is.

Next, a description will be given of the process (processing after step S1305) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "clearly less round high probability result".
In step S1305, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a "highly certain result of a small number of unspecified rounds."

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the distribution result is a "highly certain result of a few rounds with no explicit information," it executes the processes from step S1306 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the distribution result is not a "highly certain result of a few unspecified rounds", it executes the processes from step S1308 onwards.

First, a description will be given of the processing (processing after step S1306) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the distribution result is a "highly certain result of a few rounds that is not explicitly stated."
In step S1306, the MPU 62 determines whether a high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, it executes the processes from step S1303 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64, it sets a high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1307. If the high probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, a process (processing after step S1308) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the distribution result is not a "highly certain result of a few unspecified rounds" will be described.
In step S1308, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is a "low probability result" or not.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the sorting result is not a "low-probability result" (if the result is determined to be a "specially unsuccessful result"), the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. do.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the sorting result is a "low probability result", it executes the processes from step S1309 onwards.

In step S1309, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low probability mode continues at least until the lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result is other than a "low probability result."

In step S1310, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high-frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high-frequency support mode.
In step S1311, the MPU 62 sets the value of the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "100".
In step S1312, the MPU 62 sets a number limit flag in the RAM 64. If the number of times limit flag has already been set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, in the high frequency support mode, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end standard number set in the number of games counter, are set. Continue until the number of times is digested. When the MPU 62 has played the game 100 times, it clears the high frequency support flag and the number limit flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as power support processes in step S406 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if you win a jackpot in the lottery, and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the most advantageous result or the most certain result for the clearest round, the gaming state will change to the current state. Regardless of the gaming state, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and also shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

In addition, if the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode and you win a "big hit" in the lottery, and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes a "high probability result for a small number of undisclosed rounds," After the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the gaming state shifts to the high probability mode and also shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode and you win a "big hit" in the lottery, and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes "high probability result for a small number of undisclosed rounds." After the opening/closing execution mode (namely, the round number regulation mode) ends, the gaming state shifts to the high probability mode and also shifts to the low frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the low frequency support mode continue at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

In addition, if you win a jackpot in the win/fail lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes a "low probability result", the gaming state will be set to the open/close execution mode (i.e., After finishing the round number regulation mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and also shifts to the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a jackpot is won in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode continues if the game is played 100 times without winning a jackpot in the lottery. Enter frequency support mode.

In addition, if a "big win" is not achieved in the winning/failure lottery, that is, if the winning/failing result in the winning/failure lottery becomes a "special winning result" or a "normal winning result", the game state does not shift.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the gaming state transition process is performed by shifting the gaming state to the opening/closing execution mode, and then opening/closing when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and any of the holes 533A to 533C. It functions as a specific control starting means for starting the game in the execution mode.

<Electrical configuration of audio emission control device 90 and display control device 100>
FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio light emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 28, the audio emission control device 90 includes an audio emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the audio emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a nonvolatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to retain the stored information. It is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60, as described above. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp sections 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker section 24, and the display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp sections 23, 49a to 49c and the speaker section 24 based on commands sent from the main control device 60.
Furthermore, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100. Note that the audio light emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a program ROM 103, a work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. Note that the MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

The MPU 102 analyzes commands sent from the audio emission control device 90, performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the commands, and controls the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating commands for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a nonvolatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103, and is a volatile memory that requires external power supply to retain the stored information. It is a storage means.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 47. Since the VDP 105 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be said to be a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 102, and stores this image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 47. This character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the display contents of the symbol display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 107.

<About the timer interrupt process executed by the audio emission control device 90>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the audio emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing to advance the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically executes steps S1401 to S1405 (eg, every 2 msec), as shown in FIG.

In step S1401, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. Note that the MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S1402, the MPU 92 executes an effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the performance determination process, the MPU 92 determines the performance for the game round, the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like.
In step S1403, the MPU 92 executes a performance execution process based on the content of the performance determination process in step S1402. Specifically, in the performance execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the various lamp sections 23, 49a to 49c, and executes audio control of the speaker section 24.

In step S1404, the MPU 92 executes a demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period for starting the demonstration (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 controls the light emission of the various lamp sections 23 and controls the sound of the speaker section 24 .

In step S1405, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect determination process of step S1402 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether the timing has arrived to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100, and transmits the various commands to the display control device 100. If it is determined that the timing to send the command has arrived, the command is sent to the display control device 100. After that, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<About the effect determination process executed by the audio emission control device 90>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes a performance determination process in order to execute a performance for the game round, a performance for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this performance determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1501 to S1518, as shown in FIG.

In step S1501, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S1501 that each command has not been received, it executes the processes from step S1509 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines that each command has been received in step S1501, the MPU 92 determines whether the gaming result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability result" based on the content of the type command in step S1502. result.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 that the gaming result is the "most advantageous result" or "low probability result", in step S1503, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of gaming result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the same odd number or the same even number as the final stop result to be stopped and displayed on the active line L. If the information related to the combination of symbols with numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low probability result", the same even number is displayed as the final stop result on the active line L. The information related to the combination of symbols is determined. Note that the odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 that the gaming result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 92 determines that the gaming result is " It is determined whether the result is "out of the ordinary".
If the MPU 92 determines in step S1504 that the gaming result is not a "normal losing result," that is, the gaming result is a "special losing result,""an unstated small round high certainty result," or "an explicit small round high certain result." If it is either, a common symbol determination process is executed in step S1505. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information regarding a special combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the active line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects not a combination of symbols having the same numbers, but a special combination of symbols having mutually different numbers (for example, "3.4.1") is determined. Note that this special combination of symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1504 that the game result is a "normal winning result", in step S1506, it executes a symbol determination process for normal winning. In this normal out symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-reach display occurs, the MPU 92 determines information regarding the combination of symbols for the ready-to-reach display as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the active line L. Note that the combination of symbols in the reach display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information regarding a combination of symbols different from the combinations of symbols described above as a stop result to be finally displayed on the active line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a symbol combination having the same number, a special symbol combination, and a symbol combination different from any of the symbol combinations in the reach display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of the processes in step S1503, step S1505, and step S1506, the MPU 92 executes a production pattern determination process in step S1507. In this performance pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects a performance pattern corresponding to the variation command and type command by referring to a performance table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the performance duration time (performance duration period) and the content of the performance as the performance pattern. Note that in step S1507, the MPU 92 also performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display.

Furthermore, based on the selected performance pattern, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the performance execution process of step S1403 described above.

In step S1508, the MPU 92 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command that includes information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S1503, S1505, and S1506. Then, the MPU 92 stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. These fluctuation start commands and stop result commands are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for starting a fluctuation display and displaying a stop result on the symbol display device 47 based on the fluctuation start command and stop result command sent from the MPU 92. read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the active line L after starting the variable display.

After the MPU 92 executes the process in step S1508, or if it is determined in step S1501 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes in and after step S1509.
In step S1509, the MPU 92 executes round number determination processing.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the round number determination process.
In the round number determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1601 to S1612, as shown in FIG.
In step S1601, the MPU 92 determines whether the non-release command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that a non-opening command has been received, in step S1602 it executes a process for determining a non-opening effect. In this non-opening performance determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the performance corresponding to the non-opening command by referring to a performance table stored in the ROM 93 in advance.

Furthermore, based on the contents of the selected effect, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above.

In step S1603, the MPU 92 sets a non-opening performance command related to the non-opening performance determined in the non-opening performance determination process of step S1602. Then, the MPU 92 stores the non-opening effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This non-opening production command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the non-opening effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the non-opening effect.

After executing the process in step S1603, or if it is determined in step S1601 that the non-release command has not been received, the MPU 92 determines whether the release command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received in step S1604. Determine whether or not.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that an opening command has been received, in step S1605, it executes a process for determining an opening effect. In this opening performance determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the performance corresponding to the opening command by referring to a performance table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Furthermore, based on the contents of the selected effect, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above.

In step S1606, the MPU 92 sets an opening performance command related to the opening performance determined in the opening performance determination process of step S1605. Then, the MPU 92 stores the opening effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This opening effect command is sent to the display control device 100 in the command sending process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the opening effect.

After executing the process in step S1606, or if it is determined in step S1604 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 determines whether the 4-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received in step S1607. Determine whether or not.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that a 4-round execution command has been received, in step S1608, it executes a process for determining a 4-round execution effect. In this 4-round performance determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the performance corresponding to the 4-round execution command by referring to a performance table stored in the ROM 93 in advance.

Furthermore, based on the contents of the selected effect, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above.

In step S1609, the MPU 92 sets a 4-round performance command related to the 4-round performance determined in the 4-round performance determination process of step S1608. Then, the MPU 92 stores the 4-round execution effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This 4-round execution effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the 4-round execution effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the four-round performance.

After executing the process in step S1609, or if it is determined in step S1607 that the 4-round execution command has not been received, the MPU 92 receives the 16-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 in step S1610. Determine whether or not there is.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that a 16-round execution command has been received, in step S1611, it executes a process for determining a 16-round execution effect. In this 16-round performance determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the performance corresponding to the 16-round execution command by referring to a performance table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Furthermore, based on the contents of the selected effect, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above.

In step S1612, the MPU 92 sets a 16-round performance command related to the 16-round performance determined in the 16-round performance determination process of step S1611. Then, the MPU 92 stores the 16-round execution effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This 16-round execution effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the 16-round execution effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the 16-round performance.

After the MPU 92 executes the process in step S1612, or if it is determined in step S1610 that the 16-round execution command has not been received, the MPU 92 ends the round number determination process.

Returning to the explanation of the effect determination processing, the processing after step S1510 will be explained with reference to FIG.
In step S1510, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processes from step S1514 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, in step S1511 the MPU 92 determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command.

In step S1512, the MPU 92 executes a process for determining a performance for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1511. In the process of determining the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1511 that the game result is a "special losing result" or "a highly accurate result of a small number of undisclosed rounds", the MPU 92 determines the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Select performance A as the performance. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "clearly small round high certainty result", the MPU 92 selects performance B as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result" and determines that the number of round games is 4, the MPU 92 selects the performance C1 or the performance D1 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. do. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result" and determines that the number of round games is 16, the MPU 92 selects performance C2 or performance D2 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. do. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low-probability result" and determines that the number of round games is 4, it selects the performance D1 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low-probability result" and determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects performance D2 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode.

It should be noted that the duration of the performance A and the performance B corresponds to the time when opening and closing the big prize opening 38a is performed twice in a short time mode in the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the performance C1 and the performance D1 corresponds to the time when opening and closing the big prize opening 38a is performed four times in a long time mode in the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the performance C2 and the performance D2 corresponds to the time when opening and closing the big prize opening 38a is performed 16 times in a long time mode in the opening/closing execution mode.
In the following description, the effects C1 and C2 are also simply referred to as effects C, and the effects D1 and D2 are also simply referred to as effects D.

Furthermore, based on the selection results of effects A to D, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above.

In step S1513, the MPU 92 sets a command for the opening/closing execution mode that includes information related to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S1512. Then, the MPU 92 stores the opening/closing execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This opening/closing execution mode command is sent to the display control device 100 in the command sending process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing an effect for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

After the MPU 92 executes the process in step S1513, or if it is determined in step S1510 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes in and after step S1514.
In step S1514, the MPU 92 determines whether an ending command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has not been received, it executes the processes from step S1518 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, in step S1515, the MPU 92 executes a non-electric accessory release determination process. In this non-electric accessory release determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened based on the content of the ending command.

In step S1516, the MPU 92 executes a process for determining an ending effect corresponding to the state of the non-electric accessory 51 determined in step S1515. In the process of determining the ending effect, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open (when it is determined that it is closed), the MPU 92 opens the non-electric accessory 51 as the ending effect. Select a normal effect that does not notify the player. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is being released, the MPU 92 selects an opening announcement performance that notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 as an ending performance. do.

In step S1517, the MPU 92 sets an ending effect command related to the ending effect (normal effect or release announcement effect) determined in the ending effect determination process of step S1516. Then, the MPU 92 stores the ending effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This ending effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the ending effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the ending effect.

After the MPU 92 executes the process in step S1517, or if it is determined in step S1514 that no ending command has been received, the MPU 92 executes other processes in step S1518. In other processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, for example, based on the open command and the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<About the relationship between gaming results and gaming status, etc.>
Hereinafter, the relationship between game results and game states based on execution of various processes will be explained.
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results, game status, etc. Specifically, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between gaming results excluding "normally out-of-order results" and gaming states, with gaming results arranged in columns and gaming states etc. arranged in rows.
As shown in FIG. 32, the pachinko machine 10 provides game results other than "normally unsuccessful results" such as "jackpot winning" and "specially unsuccessful results", "non-disclosed low round high accuracy results", "explicitly It has the sorted results of ``few round high probability result'', ``most advantageous result'', and ``low probability result''.

Here, the "special winning result" is a game result that is selected when a "big hit winning" is not achieved in the winning lottery (symbol x in the figure), as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. Further, the distribution result is a game result that is selected when a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery (symbol ○ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the gaming results excluding the "normal losing results" and the gaming status etc. will be explained. In addition, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state etc. as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state etc., the content of the game result, The contents such as the gaming state are arbitrary.

In the "special winning result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big prize opening 38a is executed twice in a short time manner. Furthermore, in the case of a "special winning result", the winning lottery mode does not shift.
In the "undisclosed small round high certain result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which a round game is played with two times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big prize opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. be done. Furthermore, in the case of the "high probability result of a small number of unspecified rounds", the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
In this way, although the types of opening/closing execution modes are different for the "special losing result" and the "unclear small round high accuracy result", they are common in that the opening and closing of the big prize opening 38a is executed twice in a short time manner. are doing.

Furthermore, in the case of the "Special Missing Result" and the "Highly Accurate Result of an Unspecified Low Round", the stop result is a special combination of symbols, and the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is the performance A. Furthermore, the support mode does not shift in the case of "special outlier results" and "highly accurate results in unspecified few rounds." Further, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image clearly indicating that the high probability mode is on the display screen G.

Therefore, it is impossible for a player to understand whether the gaming result is a "specially unsuccessful result" or "a highly accurate result with a small number of undisclosed rounds" by checking the stop result or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if the allocation lottery results in a "high probability result for a small number of undisclosed rounds" and shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 47 will display the winning/failure lottery in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The mode is disguised as if it had not been changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying predicting whether or not the win/fail lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the "clear small round high certainty result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which a round game is played with two times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big prize opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. Ru. In addition, in the case of "clear low round high certainty result", the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the case of the "clear low round high accuracy result", the stop result will be a special combination of symbols, and the performance for the opening/closing execution mode will be performance B. In addition, in the case of "highly certain result of clear few rounds", the support mode shifts to high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays on the display screen G an image clearly indicating that the high probability mode is selected.
Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is a ``clearly small round high certainty result'' by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "best result" and "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which a round game is played with the upper limit of 4 or 16 times, and the opening/closing of the big prize opening 38a is continued for a long time. 4 or 16 times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode The performance will be performance C or performance D. Specifically, if the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode will be effect C, and the stop result will be a combination of symbols having the same even number. In this case, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode becomes effect D.
In addition, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the production for the opening/closing execution mode is the production D. Become. Further, in the "most favorable result" and the "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

Therefore, if the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect C, the player must understand that the gaming result is the "most advantageous result". can be understood. However, if the stop result is a combination of symbols with the same even number, the player can confirm that the game result is the "most advantageous result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is not possible to determine whether the result is a low-probability result or a low-probability result.

Then, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is finally the performance D, the symbol display device 47 displays on the display screen G an image clearly indicating that the high probability mode is selected. do not.

Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display on the display screen G an image clearly indicating that it is the high probability mode, and in the high frequency support mode, the standard number of times the game ends (specifically, 100 times), an image is displayed on the display screen G notifying the transition to the low-frequency support mode. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "most advantageous result," the symbol display device 47 will show that the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is ultimately the performance D in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. If so, the game result is disguised as if it were a "low-probability result."

Then, when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 47 is in the high probability mode after playing 100 times without becoming a "big hit" in the lottery. An image clearly indicating this is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the disguise that has been applied to make the game result appear to be a "low-probability result."

<About the flow when transitioning to opening/closing execution mode>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not opened and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. Note that FIG. 33 shows the non-electric accessory 51 in a simplified manner at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 33(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the time of transition to the opening/closing execution mode. FIGS. 33B and 33C are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the 4th round execution gate. FIGS. 33(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the 16th round execution gate. FIG. 33(F) is a diagram illustrating the display screen G when an opening announcement performance that notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending performance.

When transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 reduces the display screen of the symbol display device 47 by displaying each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 33(A). Place it at the lower left position of G and stop the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3.
Here, if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the command for the non-opening time has been received, so in step S1602 the MPU 92 determines that the non-opening command is received. A performance determination process is executed, and in step S1603, a command for non-opening performance related to the non-opening performance determined in the non-opening performance determining process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, ``Aim for Kroon with a right-handed hit!'', thereby instructing the player to hit right-handed. suggest.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a croon route setting process in step S1005. In this Kroon route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the Kroon route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball is moved by the slope of the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by using the blade member 521a. In addition, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state to set the croon route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide path 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is moved to the guide rail 523. will be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

If a ball enters the holes 533B, 533C (4th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that a 4th round execution command has been received, and therefore, in step S1608, the 4th round execution effect is executed. In step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round performance based on the 4-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33(B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “4R confirmed! Hit right!” in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of four round games will start.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 33, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. If a ball enters the holes 533B, 533C (fourth round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-motorized accessory 51 is not open, so the non-motorized accessory 51 is inserted as an ending effect. To select a normal performance in which the player is not notified of the opening of the game. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 33, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 33(C). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16th round execution command has been received, so in step S1611 the MPU 92 determines that the 16th round execution command has been received. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16 round execution effect command related to the 16 round execution effect determined in the 16 round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round performance based on the 16-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33(D), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “16R confirmed! Hit right!” in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of 16 round games will start. In addition, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53 and falls downward and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication passage 535 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. let

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 33, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects performance C2 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When a ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-motorized accessory 51 is open, so the non-motorized accessory 51 is displayed as an ending performance. Select an opening announcement effect to notify the player of the opening. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 33, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 33(E). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, ``The next jackpot is guaranteed to be 16R by hitting left!'' , notifies the player that the non-electric accessory 51 will be released.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right-side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is opened and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. Note that FIG. 34 shows the non-electric accessory 51 in a simplified manner at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 34(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the time of transition to the opening/closing execution mode. FIGS. 34(B) and 34(C) are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51.

If the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-motorized accessory 51 is opened, the MPU 102 reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and displays them on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 34(A). , and stop the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3.
Here, if the transition is made to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1605, the MPU 92 determines the opening performance. The process is executed, and in step S1606, an opening performance command related to the opening performance determined in the opening performance determination process of step S1605 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the opening effect based on the opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 suggests to the player to hit the ball left-handed by displaying the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "16R confirmed by hitting left-handed!" .

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a croon route setting process in step S1005. In this Kroon route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the Kroon route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball is moved by the slope of the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by using the blade member 521a. In addition, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state to set the croon route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide path 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is moved to the guide rail 523. will be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.
Note that when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the pachinko machine 10 executes the same process as in the case where it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened.

If a ball enters the non-motorized accessory 51 (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that a 16th round execution command has been received, so in step S1611 the MPU 92 executes 16th round execution. A performance determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16-round performance command related to the 16-round performance determined in the 16-round performance determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round performance based on the 16-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "16R confirmed! Hit right!" in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of 16 round games will start. Further, the game ball that enters the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B causes the non-electric accessory 51 to shift from the open state to the closed state.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the type of game result determined in step S1511 is determined. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 34, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects performance C2 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. If a ball enters the non-motorized accessory 51 (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-motorized accessory 51 is not open, so the non-motorized accessory is used as the ending performance. A normal performance in which the player is not notified of the opening of 51 is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 34, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 34(C). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has entered the high-probability mode.

In this embodiment, the starting ball entry means includes an upper operating port 36 (first starting ball entering section) and a lower operating port 37 (second starting ball entering section).
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed hitting route (first route) in which a game ball is more likely to enter the upper operating port 36 and less likely to enter the lower operating port 37; It is provided with a right-handed hitting route (second route) in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the operating port 37, and it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is placed on the left-handed route.

The main controller 60 also operates a low-frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of a ball entering the lower operating port 37 is lower than that of the upper operating port 36, and It has a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, the main controller 60 switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is a "highly certain result in a few rounds" or a "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high-frequency support mode at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery. . In addition, if the game result is a "low-probability result", the main controller 60 switches from the high-frequency support mode after executing a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of the game (internal lottery). Switch to infrequent support mode.

Therefore, if the game result is a "highly certain result in a few rounds" or "most advantageous result", the player will win a "big hit" at least in the lottery after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Until now, a game round can be executed by letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, if the game result is a "low-probability result", after the player finishes playing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player will not be able to play until he has played the game 100 times (from the high-frequency support mode to Until switching to the low-frequency support mode), a game round can be executed by letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. After that, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, so the player can complete the game by allowing the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state until the player plays 100 games. If the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed hitting route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player will change the gaming state to the open/close execution mode by the time he/she plays the 100th game. You can play the game in hopes of making the transition.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times and a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, thereby distinguishing between a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. However, by setting game states other than these, it is also possible to create a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. .

Here, if the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the player can cause the ball to enter each of the holes 533A to 533C of the croon 53 or enter the non-electric accessory 51. You can choose whether to generate a ball.
Therefore, for example, when the player opens the non-electric accessory 51, the player shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, and if the game result is "highly accurate result for few rounds" or "most advantageous result", By aiming to enter the 16th round execution gate or the 4th round execution gate, it is possible to continue the high probability mode while maintaining the open state of the non-electric accessory 51. After that, the player shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, and if the game result is a "low probability result", by aiming for the ball to enter the non-electric accessory 51, Since the non-motorized accessory 51 can be moved from the open state to the closed state, the player plays the game 100 times after moving the non-motorized accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. If the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by then, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed hitting route. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening/closing ball entering means transitions from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of one game ball, but it changes from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. It may transition to a closed state.
When the opening/closing ball entering means is configured in this way, for example, the player maintains the opening/closing ball entering means in the open state even after the first game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the order in which players aim at round game execution gates. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can further expand the player's options and further improve the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The player is provided with a croon 53, and the croon 53 has holes 533A to 533C for starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball enters the ball. After shifting to , the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by inserting game balls into the respective holes 533A to 533C. In addition, since the hole 533A shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, the player can use the main control device 60 to shift the gaming state to the next opening/closing execution mode. After that, by letting a game ball enter the non-electric accessory 51, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is better than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B, 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting a game in the opening/closing execution mode by letting the game ball enter the clone 53. . In addition, when the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the hole 533A, the player uses the main controller 60 to change the gaming state to the next opening/closing operation. By entering the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 after shifting to the mode, a higher value is given to the player than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. It is possible to start a game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) Entering the game balls into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start a game in the opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the entry of the game balls into the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A. Entering a ball can be performed by starting a game in an opening/closing execution mode in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, or by starting a game in an opening/closing execution mode that starts when a game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. Since this also provides a high value to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting a game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(4) The game state transition process is an opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. By starting the game and setting the number of openings and closings of the variable prize winning device 38 to be more than the predetermined number of times when the game balls enter the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, more than the predetermined number of game balls can be received. Since the game starts in the opening/closing execution mode in which game balls can be paid out, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(5) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53, the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball that enters the croon 53. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.
(6) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball with each plate-shaped body 513, and the closed state by receiving the game ball with each lower blade member 515. Since the game ball changes from the state to the open state, the open/closed state can be changed using only the weight of the game ball without requiring any other motive power such as electric power.

(7) After the player finishes playing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player cannot play the game using the right-handed route until he/she plays the 100th game (until the player is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode). By letting a game ball enter the operating port 37, a game round can be executed. After that, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, so the player can complete the game by allowing the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-motorized accessory 51 is placed in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-motorized accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state until the player plays the game 100 times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed hitting route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player will change the gaming state to the open/close execution mode by the time he/she plays the 100th game. You can play the game in hopes of making the transition.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 35 is a front view of a game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes a croon 53 provided on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the ball enters the hole 533A of the croon 53 and falls downward, passing through the communication passage 535. The game ball guided to the non-motorized accessory 51 via the game ball caused the non-motorized accessory 51 to transition from the closed state to the open state. In other words, in the first embodiment, the game ball that entered the hole 533A of the croon 53 was always guided to the non-electric accessory 51.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 includes a croon 53A provided in the region on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53A is not necessarily a non-motorized ball. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is not guided by the accessory 51.

FIG. 36 is an enlarged exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the croon, viewed diagonally from above.
As shown in FIG. 36, the croon 53A includes a disc-shaped rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball guided to the croon 53A via the guide rail 525, and a disc-shaped rolling surface 531 provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 531. It includes a side wall 532, a cylindrical rotating body 537 disposed below the rolling surface 531 and rotatable around a central axis, and a saucer 538 disposed below the rotating body 537. There is.
Note that the guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from its center, and has three holes 533A to 533C formed at equal intervals from each other; The protrusion 534 has three side surfaces that slope downward toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is sloped downward from the side wall 532 toward the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the croon 53A via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C (Fig. (See middle arrow A).

Each hole 533A to 533C is provided with a detection sensor 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40i to 40k is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533C. Detects the entry of game balls. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when balls enter each of the holes 533A to 533C, unlike when balls enter various winning holes. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be of any type as long as they can individually detect winnings of game balls, and for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors may be used.

Each of the holes 533A to 533C serves as an opportunity to start a round game when the player wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery, and after transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Specifically, when a ball enters the hole 533A, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing a 16-round game, so it starts executing a 16-round game in the hole 533A. A mark is displayed around the hole 533A to suggest this.
Furthermore, when a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing four round games. No markings are displayed to suggest that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the clone 53A selects game balls flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery performed based on the entry of game balls into the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry means that allows ball entry.
Further, the croon 53A includes holes 533A to 533C (a plurality of ball entry portions) into which the game balls entered into the croon 53A enter. This croon 53A has a rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball that has entered the croon 53A, and a plurality of ball entry parts are provided on the rolling surface 531, and a game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 531 is provided. Let the ball enter the ball. Specifically, the rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 531, and includes a plurality of ball entry portions provided at equal intervals.

In addition, in this embodiment, the plurality of ball entry parts are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53A, and allow the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 531 to enter. On the other hand, the plurality of ball entry sections may be provided, for example, in a distribution mechanism that distributes game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means to any of the plurality of ball entry sections. In this case, the probability of allocating the game ball to any of the plurality of ball entry sections by the allocating mechanism may be the same or may be different. In short, the variable ball entry means only needs to include a plurality of ball entry sections.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable ball entry means includes a plurality of ball entry parts, but the variable ball entry means may include one ball entry part.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A (second ball entry part) are the 16th round execution gate that starts the execution of the 16th round game. Further, each hole 533B, 533C (first ball entry part) is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games. Therefore, the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B, 533C. It gives value to players.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (four times in this embodiment) when a game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. A game in the opening/closing execution mode in which game balls can be paid out is started, and when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed more than a predetermined number of times (in the present embodiment). 16 times), a game in an opening/closing execution mode is started in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when a game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A can be performed by setting the number of openings and closings of the variable prize winning device 38, so that each hole 533B, 533C The player is given a higher value than the opening/closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the hole, but for example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, A higher value may be given to the player than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game ball. In short, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section is the same as the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is sufficient to provide the player with a higher value than the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the hole 533A is used as a 16-round execution gate that starts execution of 16 round games, and each hole 533B, 533C is used as a 4-round execution gate that starts execution of 4 round games, and each hole The correspondence between 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between each of the holes 533A to 533C and the 16th round execution gate and the 4th round execution gate does not have to be fixed; for example, the correspondence may be changed based on the results of an internal lottery. You can. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the gameplay and increase the attention of the players to the game.

The rotating body 537 is formed in a circular shape on its upper surface, and has upper openings 537A1 to 537A3 formed at positions corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C, and has a circular shape in its lower surface and an upper opening 537A1. -537A3 are provided with lower openings 537B1 to 537B3 that communicate with the lower openings 537B1 to 537B3.
The lower opening 537B1 is opened so as to be concentric with the central axis of the rotating body 537. After rolling on the rolling surface 531, the game ball enters one of the holes 533A to 533C, falls downward, and enters the upper opening 537A1. It passes through the passage 537C1 and is discharged from the lower opening 537B1 (see arrow B1 in the figure).

The lower opening 537B2 opens directly below the upper opening 537A2. After rolling on the rolling surface 531, the game ball enters one of the holes 533A to 533C, falls downward, and enters the upper opening 537A2. It passes through the passage 537C2 and is discharged from the lower opening 537B2 (see arrow B2 in the figure).
The lower opening 537B3 opens directly below the upper opening 537A3. After rolling on the rolling surface 531, the game ball enters one of the holes 533A to 533C, falls downward, and enters the upper opening 537A3. It passes through the passage 537C3 and is discharged from the lower opening 537B3 (see arrow B3 in the figure).

The saucer 538 has a disc-shaped rolling surface 538A that rolls the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 and falls downward, and a side wall 538B provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 538A. We are prepared.
The rolling surface 538A includes a cylindrical portion 538A1 formed concentrically at the center thereof. This cylindrical portion 538A1 guides the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B1 to the communication passage 538C. This communication passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51 similarly to the communication passage 535 in the first embodiment (see arrow C in the figure).
The side wall 538B includes a rectangular opening 538B1 formed laterally. This opening 538B1 guides the game balls discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 to the discharge passage 538D. This discharge passage 538D discharges game balls into the gaming area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35), similar to the discharge passage 536 in the first embodiment.

Here, the rolling surface 538A is inclined so as to descend toward the opening 538B1 side.
Therefore, the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 rolls on the rolling surface 538A, and then is guided to the discharge passage 538D via the opening 538B1 (see arrow D in the figure). .

The rotating body 537 also has a circular groove 537D formed on its lower surface and concentric with the central axis of the rotating body 537, and a gear (not shown) formed on its circumferential surface. and a rotating body drive section 537E (see FIG. 37) that rotates the rotating body 537 via this gear.
The groove portion 537D engages with the side wall 538B of the receiving tray 538, thereby placing the rotating body 537 on the receiving tray 538 and positioning the rotating body 537 with respect to the receiving tray 538.
The rotating body drive unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed via a gear formed on the circumferential surface of the rotating body 537.
Note that in this embodiment, the rotary body drive section 537E rotates the rotary body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed, but the rotation speed may be varied.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control that causes the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source and power source that executes launch control that causes the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch game balls. A launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main control device 60 includes a board box that accommodates a main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a marking means that leaves a mark when opened, and may be provided with a marking structure that leaves a mark when opened. Specifically, the trace means includes a configuration in which a board box is constructed by combining multiple case bodies, and a joint part (crimped part) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when each case body is separated, and It is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing seal that leaves traces of peeling by leaving an adhesive layer on the object to be adhered to is pasted across the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies, etc. can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a nonvolatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain stored information. This ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be explained in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to retain the stored information. It is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a holding ball storage area 64b, and an electric role holding area 64c. These areas will be explained in detail later.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60, a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k, and a non-electric accessory opening detection sensor 519. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 65, a payout control device 70, and a sound emission control device 90. In addition, the output port of the MPU 62 is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation opening 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. Rotation that rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed via a blade member driving unit 521c that opens and closes the plate 521a, a plate driving unit 523c that opens and closes the plate 523a, and a gear formed on the circumferential surface of the rotating body 537. It is connected to the body drive section 537E, the main display section 45, and the accessory display section 46.

Note that the main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric accessory open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Moreover, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning a prize driving section 38c to open and close the big winning a prize opening 38a. Further, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the blade member driving section 521c to open and close the blade member 521a. Furthermore, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the plate driving section 523c to open/close the plate 523a. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the rotary body drive section 537E to rotate the rotary body 537. Furthermore, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery conducted based on winnings to the respective operating ports 36 and 37. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery conducted based on the winnings in each through gate 41.

<About the flow when transitioning to opening/closing execution mode>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not opened and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. Note that FIG. 38 shows the non-electric accessory 51 in a simplified manner at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 38(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the time of transition to the opening/closing execution mode. FIGS. 38(B) and 38(C) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 that did not become open after the ball entered the 4th round execution gate. FIGS. 38(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 in an open state after the ball enters the fourth round execution gate. FIG. 38(F) is a diagram illustrating the display screen G when an opening announcement performance that notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending performance.

When transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 reduces the display screen of the symbol display device 47 by displaying each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 38(A). Place it at the lower left position of G and stop the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3.
Here, if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the command for the non-opening time has been received, so in step S1602 the MPU 92 determines that the non-opening command is received. A performance determination process is executed, and in step S1603, a command for non-opening performance related to the non-opening performance determined in the non-opening performance determining process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, ``Aim for Kroon with a right-handed hit!'', thereby instructing the player to hit right-handed. suggest.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a croon route setting process in step S1005. In this Kroon route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the Kroon route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball is moved by the slope of the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by using the blade member 521a. In addition, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state to set the croon route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide path 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is moved to the guide rail 523. will be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

If a ball enters the holes 533B, 533C (4th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that a 4th round execution command has been received, and therefore, in step S1608, the 4th round execution effect is executed. In step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round performance based on the 4-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 38(B) and 38(D), the MPU 102 reads the line of the angel in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "4R confirmed! Hit right!" By displaying this, the player is informed that the execution of four round games will start.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

FIG. 39 is a perspective view showing the flow in which the game ball is guided to the discharge passage after the ball enters the 4th round execution gate.
When a ball enters the holes 533B, 533C (4th round execution gate), the game ball passes through any of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537 and falls into the saucer 538. .
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, as shown in FIG. 39(A).

Here, since the rotating body driving section 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed via a gear formed on the circumferential surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is It communicates with any of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, contacts the top surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C2, the game ball will move as shown in FIG. 39(B). After rolling on the rolling surface 538A of the tray 538, it is guided to the discharge passage 538D via the opening 538B1 (see arrow in the figure). This discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35).

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 38, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is discharged into the gaming area through the discharge passage 538D, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not being opened, so the MPU 92 does not play the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 as an ending performance. Select the normal performance that does not notify the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 38, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 38(C). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has entered the high-probability mode.

FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing the flow in which the game ball is guided to the communication passage after the ball enters the 4th round execution gate.
Further, for example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, as shown in FIG. 40(A).

Here, since the rotating body driving section 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed via a gear formed on the circumferential surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is It communicates with any of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, contacts the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C1, the game ball will move as shown in FIG. 40(B). It is guided to the communication passage 538C via the cylindrical portion 538A1 (see the arrow in the figure). This communication passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51. Thereafter, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication path 538C shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state.

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the type of game result determined in step S1511 is determined. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 38, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the performance C1 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication path 538C, the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is open in step S1515, so the non-electric accessory 51 is guided as an ending performance. Select an opening announcement effect that notifies the player of the opening of the game. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 38, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 38(E). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, ``The next jackpot is guaranteed to be 16R by hitting left!'' , informs the player that the non-electric accessory 51 will be released.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops. Then, the game balls wait without entering the holes 533A to 533C until the holes 533A to 533C communicate with the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537. In other words, the game ball does not enter until each of the holes 533A to 533C and the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537 communicate with each other.

Here, if the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the player can cause the ball to enter each of the holes 533A to 533C of the croon 53 or enter the non-electric accessory 51. You can choose whether to generate a ball.
Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, for example, the player can first aim to enter the 16th round execution gate of the croon 53, and as a result, the player can play the 16th round. If the ball is waiting to enter the 4th round execution gate instead of the execution gate, it is possible to further aim for the ball to enter the non-electric accessory 51. If the ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 while waiting for the ball to enter the 4th round execution gate of the croon 53, execution of the 16 round game can be started. . According to this, the player can switch which round game execution gate to aim for depending on the situation, and it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not opened and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. Note that FIG. 41 shows the non-electric accessory 51 in a simplified manner at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 41(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the time of transition to the opening/closing execution mode. FIGS. 41(B) and 41(C) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 that did not become open after the ball entered the 16th round execution gate. FIGS. 41(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 in an open state after the ball enters the 16th round execution gate. FIG. 41(F) is a diagram showing the display screen G when an opening announcement performance that notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending performance.

When transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 displays each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a reduced size and displays the display screen of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 41(A). Place it at the lower left position of G and stop the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3.
Here, if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the command for the non-opening time has been received, so in step S1602 the MPU 92 determines that the non-opening command is received. A performance determination process is executed, and in step S1603, a command for non-opening performance related to the non-opening performance determined in the non-opening performance determining process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, ``Aim for Kroon with a right-handed hit!'', thereby instructing the player to hit right-handed. suggest.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a croon route setting process in step S1005. In this Kroon route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the Kroon route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball is moved by the slope of the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by using the blade member 521a. In addition, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state to set the croon route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide path 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is moved to the guide rail 523. will be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

If the ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that a 16th round execution command has been received, and therefore determines the 16th round execution effect in step S1611. The process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16-round performance command related to the 16-round performance determined in the 16-round performance determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round performance based on the 16-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(B) and FIG. 41(D), the MPU 102 reads the line of the angel in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "16R confirmed! Hit right!" By displaying this, the player is informed that the execution of the 16 round game will start.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

FIG. 42 is a perspective view showing the flow in which the game ball is guided to the discharge passage after the ball enters the 16th round execution gate.
When a ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the game ball passes through any of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537 and falls into the saucer 538.
When the ball enters the hole 533A, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, as shown in FIG. 42(A).

Here, since the rotating body driving section 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed via a gear formed on the circumferential surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is It communicates with any of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.
For example, if a ball enters the hole 533A, contacts the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C2, the game ball will move as shown in FIG. 42(B). After rolling on the rolling surface 538A of the tray 538, it is guided to the discharge passage 538D via the opening 538B1 (see arrow in the figure). This discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35).

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 41, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects performance C2 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is discharged into the game area through the discharge passage 538D, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not being opened, so the MPU 92 performs the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 as an ending performance. Select the normal performance that does not notify the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 41, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 41(C). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode.

FIG. 43 is a perspective view showing the flow in which the game ball is guided to the communication passage after the ball enters the 16th round execution gate.
Further, when the ball enters the hole 533A, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, as shown in FIG. 43(A).

Here, since the rotating body drive unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed via a gear formed on the circumferential surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533A is It communicates with any of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533A, contacts the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C1, the game ball will move as shown in FIG. 43(B). It is guided to the communication passage 538C via the cylindrical portion 538A1 (see the arrow in the figure). This communication passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51. Thereafter, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication path 538C shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state.

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the symbol display device 47 stops displaying a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, the MPU 92 It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects performance C2 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication path 538C, the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is open in step S1515, so the non-electric accessory 51 is guided as an ending performance. Select an opening announcement effect that notifies the player of the opening of the game. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 41, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 41(E). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, ``The next jackpot is guaranteed to be 16R by hitting left!'' , informs the player that the non-electric accessory 51 will be released.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the rotating body 537 rotates about the axis passing through the center of the rolling surface 531, and allows the game balls that have entered each of the holes 533A to 533C to enter the ball. Further, the rotating body 537 is formed at a position corresponding to each of the holes 533A to 533C, and is provided with a plurality of rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 for guiding game balls entered into each of the holes 533A to 533C. . The plurality of rotary body passages 537C1 to 537C3 include a rotary body passage 537C2 and a rotary body passage 537C3 (first rotary body passage) that prevent the non-electric accessory 51 from shifting from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of a game ball. ), and a rotating body passage 537C1 (second rotating body passage) that shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball. Therefore, the rotating body 537 and the saucer 538 function as an opening/closing lottery means for executing a lottery regarding the non-electric accessory 51 based on the entry of game balls into the respective holes 533A to 533C.

In this embodiment, the rotating body 537 and the saucer 538 are used as the opening/closing lottery means, but for example, similar to the internal lottery performed based on winnings in the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, the counter A lottery using . Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing lottery means draws a lottery as to whether or not the opening/closing ball entering means should be shifted from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering section. A lottery may be performed to determine whether the ball means is to be shifted from an unfavorable state in which it is easy to close to an advantageous state in which it is easy to open. In short, the opening/closing lottery means may be any type of lottery as long as it can perform a lottery regarding the opening/closing ball entering means based on the entry of game balls into the ball entry section.

In this embodiment, the starting ball entry means includes an upper operating port 36 (first starting ball entering section) and a lower operating port 37 (second starting ball entering section).
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed hitting route (first route) in which a game ball is more likely to enter the upper operating port 36 and less likely to enter the lower operating port 37; It is provided with a right-handed hitting route (second route) in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the operating port 37, and it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is placed on the left-handed route.

The main controller 60 also operates a low-frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of a ball entering the lower operating port 37 is lower than that of the upper operating port 36, and It has a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, the main controller 60 switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is a "highly certain result in a few rounds" or a "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high-frequency support mode at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery. . In addition, if the game result is a "low-probability result", the main controller 60 switches from the high-frequency support mode after executing a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of the game (internal lottery). Switch to infrequent support mode.

Therefore, if the game result is a "highly certain result in a few rounds" or "most advantageous result", the player will win a "big hit" at least in the lottery after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Until now, a game round can be executed by letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, if the game result is a "low-probability result", after the player finishes playing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player will not be able to play until he has played the game 100 times (from the high-frequency support mode to Until switching to the low-frequency support mode), a game round can be executed by letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. After that, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, so the player can complete the game by allowing the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-motorized accessory 51 is placed in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-motorized accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state until the player plays the game 100 times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed hitting route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player will change the gaming state to the open/close execution mode by the time he/she plays the 100th game. You can play the game in hopes of making the transition.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times and a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, thereby distinguishing between a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. However, by setting game states other than these, it is also possible to create a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. .

According to this embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Since the clone 53A is equipped with holes 533A to 533C for starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball enters the ball, the player can change the gaming state to the opening/closing execution mode using the main control device 60. After shifting to , the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by inserting game balls into the respective holes 533A to 533C. In addition, the croon 53A includes a rotating body 537 and a saucer 538 that perform a lottery regarding the non-electric accessory 51 based on the entry of game balls into each of the holes 533A to 533C. If the player wins the lottery held in , and moves the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, the player uses the main control device 60 to shift the gaming state to the next opening/closing execution mode. After that, by letting a game ball enter the non-electric accessory 51, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is better than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B, 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting a game in the opening/closing execution mode by letting the game ball enter the clone 53A. . In addition, if the player wins the lottery executed by the rotating body 537 and moves the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, the player can change the gaming state to the next time using the main control device 60. By entering the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the player can enjoy a higher value than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. It is possible to start the game in the opening/closing execution mode given to the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) Entering the game balls into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start a game in the opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the entry of the game balls into the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A. Entering a ball is performed by starting a game in an opening/closing execution mode in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Since this also provides a high value to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting a game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(4) The game state transition process is an opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. By starting the game and setting the number of openings and closings of the variable prize winning device 38 to be more than the predetermined number of times when the game balls enter the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, more than the predetermined number of game balls can be received. Since the game starts in the opening/closing execution mode in which game balls can be paid out, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(5) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53A, the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball that enters the croon 53A. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(6) The opening/closing lottery means includes a rotating body 537 that rotates about an axis passing through the center of the rolling surface 531 and receives game balls entered into each of the holes 533A to 533C, and this rotating body 537 has the following functions: Rotating body passages 537C2, 537C3 that do not shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. The rotating body passage 537C1 is provided. According to this, the opening/closing lottery means independently closes the non-electric accessory 51 without being influenced by the croon 53A having each of the holes 533A to 533C, which starts the game in the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball enters. A lottery can be performed to determine whether or not to transition from the state to the open state. In addition, when the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by letting the game balls that have entered the holes 533A to 533C enter the rotating body passage 537C1 of the rotating body 537, the game After the player shifts the gaming state to the next opening/closing execution mode using the main control device 60, the player enters the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51, thereby making it possible for the player to enter the game ball into each hole 533B, 533C. It is possible to start a game in the opening/closing execution mode that gives the player a higher value than the game in the opening/closing execution mode to be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball with each plate-shaped body 513, and the closed state by receiving the game ball with each lower blade member 515. Since the game ball changes from the state to the open state, the open/closed state can be changed using only the weight of the game ball without requiring any other motive power such as electric power.

(8) After the player finishes playing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player may play the game using the right-handed route until he or she has played the game 100 times (until the player is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode). By letting a game ball enter the operating port 37, a game round can be executed. After that, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, so the player can complete the game by allowing the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-motorized accessory 51 is placed in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-motorized accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state until the player plays the game 100 times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed hitting route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player will change the gaming state to the open/close execution mode by the time he/she plays the 100th game. You can play the game in hopes of making the transition.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a front view of a game board according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes the croon 53 provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate) of the croon 53 and falls downward. However, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication path 535 caused the non-electric accessory 51 to transition from the closed state to the open state. In other words, in the first embodiment, the game ball that entered the 16th round execution gate was always guided to the non-electric accessory 51.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 includes a croon 53B provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the game ball that enters the 16th round execution gate of the croon 53B is not necessarily This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is not guided by the non-electric accessory 51.

FIG. 45 is an enlarged exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the croon, viewed diagonally from above.
As shown in FIG. 45, the croon 53B includes a first croon 55 connected to a guide rail 525 and a second croon 56 arranged below the first croon 55.
The first croon 55 includes a disc-shaped rolling surface 551 that rolls the game ball guided to the first croon 55 via the guide rail 525, and a side wall 552 provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 551. It is equipped with
Note that the guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552.

The rolling surface 551 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof, and has two holes 553A, 553B formed at equal intervals from each other; The protrusion 554 has two side surfaces that slope downward toward the 553B side. Moreover, the rolling surface 551 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 552 toward the holes 553A and 553B.
Therefore, the game ball guided to the first croon 55 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552, and then enters either of the holes 553A and 553B. (See arrow A in the figure).

Each hole 553A, 553B is provided with a detection sensor 40i, 40j (see FIG. 114) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40i, 40j is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 553A, and the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 553B. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when balls enter the holes 553A and 553B, unlike when balls enter the various winning holes. Further, the detection sensors 40i and 40j may be of any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of game balls, and for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors may be used.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 553A, so the hole 553A functions as a 16-round execution gate. Moreover, since the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 553B, the hole 553B functions as a 4-round execution gate. Note that this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the detection sensor 40k is not used.

Each hole 553A, 553B serves as an opportunity to start a round game when the player wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery, and after transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, a ball enters each hole 553A, 553B, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Specifically, when a ball enters the hole 553A, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing a 16-round game, so it starts executing a 16-round game in the hole 553A. Marks are displayed around the hole 553A to suggest this.
Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 starts executing a four-round game when a ball enters the hole 553B, it is suggested that the pachinko machine 10 starts executing a four-round game in the hole 553B. It does not display the mark as it should.

The first croon 55 also includes a guide rail 555A that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 553A to the second croon 56, and a guide rail 555B that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 553B to the second croon 56. We are prepared.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first croon 55 selects a game that flows down the gaming area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry means that allows the ball to enter the ball.
Further, the first croon 55 includes holes 553A and 553B (a plurality of ball entry portions) into which the game balls that have entered the first croon 55 enter. This first croon 55 has a rolling surface 551 that rolls the game ball that has entered the first croon 55, and the plurality of ball entry parts are provided on the rolling surface 551 and the rolling surface 551. Enter a rolling game ball. Specifically, the rolling surface 551 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 551, and includes a plurality of ball entry portions provided at equal intervals.

In addition, in this embodiment, the plurality of ball entry parts are provided on the rolling surface 551 of the first croon 55, and allow the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 551 to enter. On the other hand, the plurality of ball entry sections may be provided, for example, in a distribution mechanism that distributes game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means to any of the plurality of ball entry sections. In this case, the probability of allocating the game ball to any of the plurality of ball entry sections by the allocating mechanism may be the same or may be different. In short, the variable ball entry means only needs to include a plurality of ball entry sections.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable ball entry means includes a plurality of ball entry parts, but the variable ball entry means may include one ball entry part.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A (second ball entry part) are the 16th round execution gate that starts the execution of the 16th round game. Further, the hole 553B (first ball entry portion) is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games. Therefore, the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A has a higher value than the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. is granted to the person.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the variable winning device 38 a predetermined number of times (four times in this embodiment) when the game ball enters the hole 553B, thereby releasing a predetermined number of game balls. A game in the payout opening/closing execution mode is started, and when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A, the variable winning device 38 is opened/closed more times than a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 16 times). By setting this, a game is started in an open/close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A is controlled by setting the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38. Although the game is given a higher value to the player than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when a ball enters the hole, for example, by setting the opening time of the variable prize winning device 38, the game ball enters the hole 553B. A higher value may be given to the player than a game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when a ball is hit. In short, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section is the same as the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is sufficient to provide the player with a higher value than the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hole 553A is used as a 16-round execution gate for starting execution of 16 round games, the hole 553B is used as a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games, and each hole 553A, 553B The correspondence between the 16th round execution gate and the 4th round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 553A and 553B and the 16th round execution gate and the 4th round execution gate does not have to be fixed; for example, the correspondence may be changed based on the results of an internal lottery. You can. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the gameplay and increase the attention of the players to the game.

The second croon 56 includes a disc-shaped rolling surface 561 that rolls the game ball guided to the second croon 56 via the guide rail 555A and the guide rail 555B, and is provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 561. side wall 562.
Note that the guide rail 555A and the guide rail 555B guide the game ball to the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562.

The rolling surface 561 is formed at a predetermined distance from its center, and has three holes 563A to 563C formed at equal intervals from each other; The protrusion 564 has three side surfaces that slope downward toward the 563C side. Furthermore, the rolling surface 561 is sloped downward from the side wall 562 toward the holes 563A to 563C.
Therefore, the game ball guided to the second croon 56 via the guide rail 555A and the guide rail 555B rolls on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562, and then enters one of the holes 563A to 563C. (See arrow B in the figure).

Further, the second croon 56 is connected to a hole 563A formed on the front side (the front side in the figure) of the game board 31, and as shown by arrow C in the figure, the second croon 56 enters the hole 563A and moves downward. It is connected to a communication passage 565 that guides the fallen game ball to the non-electric accessory 51 and two holes 563B and 563C formed on the back side of the game board 31 (the back side in the figure), and is connected to the arrow D in the figure. As shown in FIG. 4, a discharge passage 566 is provided for discharging the game balls that have entered the holes 563B and 563C and fallen downward into the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 44).

The communication passage 565 guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51 similarly to the communication passage 535 in the first embodiment, so the hole 563A suggests that the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51. Marks are displayed around the hole 563A as shown in FIG.
The discharge passage 566 discharges the game balls to the game area in the same manner as the discharge passage 536 in the first embodiment, so the holes 563B and 563C have holes 563B and 563C so as to indicate that the game balls are discharged to the game area. , 563C is not displayed.

<About the flow when transitioning to opening/closing execution mode>
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not opened and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. Note that FIG. 46 shows the non-electric accessory 51 in a simplified manner at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 46(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the time of transition to the opening/closing execution mode. FIGS. 46(B) and 46(C) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 that did not become open after the ball entered the fourth round execution gate. FIGS. 46(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 in an open state after the ball enters the 4th round execution gate. FIG. 46(F) is a diagram showing the display screen G when an opening announcement performance that notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending performance.

When transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 displays each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a reduced size and displays the display screen of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 46(A). It is placed at the lower left position of G, and the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the command for the non-opening time has been received, so in step S1602 the MPU 92 determines that the non-opening command is received. A performance determination process is executed, and in step S1603, a command for non-opening performance related to the non-opening performance determined in the non-opening performance determining process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, ``Aim for Kroon with a right-handed hit!'', thereby instructing the player to hit right-handed. suggest.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a croon route setting process in step S1005. In this Kroon route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the Kroon route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball is moved by the slope of the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by using the blade member 521a. In addition, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state to set the croon route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide path 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is moved to the guide rail 522. will be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the first croon 55 via the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the first croon 55 of the croon 53B via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552, and then enters either of the holes 553A and 553B. It turns out.

FIG. 47 is a top view of Croon when a ball enters the 4th round execution gate. Specifically, FIG. 47(A) is a top view of the first croon 55, and FIGS. 47(B) and (C) are top views of the second croon 56.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 47(A), when a ball enters the hole 553B (4th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the 4th round execution command has been received in step S1607. Therefore, in step S1608, a 4-round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is executed. Set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round performance based on the 4-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 46(B) and 46(D), the MPU 102 reads the lines of the angel in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "4R confirmed! Hit right!" By displaying this, the player is informed that the execution of four round games will start.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Further, when a ball enters the hole 553B (fourth round execution gate), the game ball is guided to the second croon 56 via the guide rail 555B. After this game ball rolls on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562, it enters one of the holes 563A to 563C.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 47(B), when a ball enters the holes 563B, 563C, the game ball is discharged to the game area via the discharge passage 566.

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 46, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is discharged into the game area through the discharge passage 566, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not being opened, so the MPU 92 does not play the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 as an ending performance. Select the normal performance that does not notify the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 46, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 46(C). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode.

Further, for example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 47(C), when a ball enters the hole 563A, the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication path 565. Thereafter, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication passage 565 causes the non-electric accessory 51 to transition from the closed state to the open state.

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 46, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 565, the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is open in step S1515, so the non-electric accessory 51 is guided as an ending performance. Select an opening announcement effect to notify the player of the opening of the game. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 46, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 46(E). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, ``The next jackpot is guaranteed to be 16R by hitting left!'' , notifies the player that the non-electric accessory 51 will be released.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not opened and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. Note that FIG. 48 shows the non-electric accessory 51 in a simplified manner at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 48(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the time of transition to the opening/closing execution mode. FIGS. 48(B) and 48(C) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 that did not become open after the ball entered the 16th round execution gate. FIGS. 48(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 in an open state after the ball enters the 16th round execution gate. FIG. 48(F) is a diagram showing the display screen G when an opening announcement performance that notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending performance.

When transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 reduces the display screen of the symbol display device 47 by displaying each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 48(A). It is placed at the lower left position of G, and the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the command for the non-opening time has been received, so in step S1602 the MPU 92 determines that the non-opening command is received. A performance determination process is executed, and in step S1603, a command for non-opening performance related to the non-opening performance determined in the non-opening performance determining process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, ``Aim for Kroon with a right-handed hit!'', thereby instructing the player to hit right-handed. suggest.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a croon route setting process in step S1005. In this Kroon route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the Kroon route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball is moved by the slope of the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by using the blade member 521a. In addition, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state to set the croon route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide path 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is moved to the guide rail 523. will be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the first croon 55 of the croon 53B via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552, and then enters either of the holes 553A and 553B. It turns out.

FIG. 49 is a top view of Croon when a ball enters the 16th round execution gate. Specifically, FIG. 49(A) is a top view of the first croon 55, and FIGS. 49(B) and (C) are top views of the second croon 56.
For example, if a ball enters the hole 553A (16th round execution gate) as shown by the arrow in FIG. Therefore, in step S1611, a 16-round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16-round execution effect command related to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is executed. Set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round performance based on the 16-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48(B) and FIG. 48(D), the MPU 102 reads the lines of the angel in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "16R confirmed! Hit right!" By displaying this, the player is informed that the execution of the 16 round game will start.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Further, when a ball enters the hole 553A (16th round execution gate), the game ball is guided to the second croon 56 via the guide rail 555A. After this game ball rolls on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562, it enters one of the holes 563A to 563C.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 49(B), when a ball enters the holes 563B, 563C, the game ball is discharged to the game area via the discharge passage 566.

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 48, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects performance C2 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is discharged into the game area through the discharge passage 566, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not being opened, so the MPU 92 does not play the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 as an ending performance. Select the normal performance that does not notify the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 48, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 48(C). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode.

Further, for example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 49(C), when a ball enters the hole 563A, the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication path 565. Thereafter, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication passage 565 causes the non-electric accessory 51 to transition from the closed state to the open state.

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the type of game result determined in step S1511 is determined. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 48, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects performance C2 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 565, the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is open in step S1515, so the non-electric accessory 51 is guided as an ending performance. Select an opening announcement effect that notifies the player of the opening of the game. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 48, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 48(E). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 48(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, ``The next jackpot is guaranteed to be 16R by hitting left!'' , informs the player that the non-electric accessory 51 will be released.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the second croon 56 functions as a lottery croon having the rolling surface 561 (lottery rolling surface) that rolls the game balls that have entered the holes 553A, 553B. There is. Further, the second croon 56 is provided on the rolling surface 561 and includes holes 563A to 563C (a plurality of lottery ball entry parts) into which game balls rolling on the rolling surface 561 enter. The plurality of lottery ball entry parts each include holes 563B and 563C (first lottery ball entry parts) that do not shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. It is provided with a hole 563A (second lottery ball entry part) for shifting the non-electric accessory 51 from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball. Therefore, the second croon 56 functions as an opening/closing lottery means for executing a lottery regarding the non-electric accessory 51 based on the entry of game balls into the respective holes 553A, 553B.

In this embodiment, the second croon 56 is used as the opening/closing lottery means, but a counter may also be used, for example, similar to the internal lottery performed based on winnings in the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. A lottery may be used. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing lottery means draws a lottery to determine whether or not to shift the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering section. A lottery may be performed to determine whether the ball means is to be shifted from an unfavorable state in which it is easy to close to an advantageous state in which it is easy to open. In short, the opening/closing lottery means may be any type of lottery as long as it can perform a lottery regarding the opening/closing ball entering means based on the entry of game balls into the ball entry section.

In this embodiment, the starting ball entry means includes an upper operating port 36 (first starting ball entering section) and a lower operating port 37 (second starting ball entering section).
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed hitting route (first route) in which a game ball is more likely to enter the upper operating port 36 and less likely to enter the lower operating port 37; It is provided with a right-handed hitting route (second route) in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the operating port 37, and it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed hitting route.

The main controller 60 also operates in a low-frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of a ball entering the lower operating port 37 is lower than that of the upper operating port 36, and a It has a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, the main controller 60 switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is a "clearly small round high certainty result" or "most advantageous result", the main controller 60 continues the high-frequency support mode at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the winning/failure lottery. . In addition, if the game result is a "low-probability result", the main controller 60 switches from the high-frequency support mode after executing the game (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment). Switch to infrequent support mode.

Therefore, if the game result is a "highly certain result in a few rounds" or "most advantageous result", the player will win a "big hit" at least in the lottery after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Until now, a game round can be executed by letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, if the game result is a "low-probability result", after the player finishes playing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player will not be able to play until he has played the game 100 times (from the high-frequency support mode to Until switching to the low-frequency support mode), a game round can be executed by letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. After that, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, so the player can complete the game by allowing the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-motorized accessory 51 is placed in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-motorized accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state until the player plays the game 100 times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed hitting route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player will change the gaming state to the open/close execution mode by the time he/she plays the 100th game. You can play the game in hopes of making the transition.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times and a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, thereby distinguishing between a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. However, by setting game states other than these, it is also possible to create a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. .

According to this embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Since the first croon 55 is provided with holes 553A and 553B for starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball enters, the player can control the game state using the main controller 60. After shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering game balls into the respective holes 553A, 553B. In addition, the first croon 55 includes a second croon 56 that performs a lottery regarding the non-electric accessory 51 based on the entry of game balls into the respective holes 553A and 553B. If the player wins the lottery to be executed and shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, the player uses the main controller 60 to shift the gaming state to the next opening/closing execution mode. By letting a game ball enter the non-electric accessory 51, a game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) A game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when a game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A has a higher value than a game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when a game ball enters the hole 553B. Since the game ball is given to the player, when the game ball enters the first croon 55 to start a game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 553A. In addition, if the player wins the lottery executed in the second crew 56 and moves the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, the player can change the gaming state next time using the main control device 60. After shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, by letting the game ball enter the non-electric accessory 51, a higher value is given to the player than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. It is possible to start a game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) Entering a game ball into the hole 553B can start a game in an opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and entering a game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A By starting a game in the opening/closing execution mode in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls, the player receives a higher value than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. Therefore, when starting a game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 553A. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(4) The game state transition process starts a game in an opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters the hole 553B. However, by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to be more than a predetermined number of times when the game balls enter the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A, more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be received. Since the player starts the game in the opening/closing execution mode in which the player can pay out , the player expects the ball to enter the hole 553A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(5) Since the holes 553A and 553B are provided on the rolling surface 551 of the first croon 55, the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball that enters the first croon 55. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(6) The opening/closing lottery means includes holes 563B and 563C that prevent the non-electric accessory 51 from shifting from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the opening/closing lottery means that prevents the non-electric accessory 51 from shifting from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. A second croon 56 is provided with a hole 563A for transitioning from a closed state to an open state. According to this, the opening/closing lottery means independently selects the non-motorized accessory 51 without being influenced by the first croon 55 having the holes 553A, 553B that start the game in the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball enters the ball. A lottery can be performed to determine whether or not to transition from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by allowing the game balls that have entered the holes 553A and 553B to enter the hole 563A, the player After shifting the game state to the next opening/closing execution mode, by letting the game ball enter the non-electric accessory 51, the game state is higher than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. It is possible to start a game in an open/close execution mode that provides value to the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball with each plate-shaped body 513, and the closed state by receiving the game ball with each lower blade member 515. Since the game ball changes from the state to the open state, it is possible to change the open/close state using only the weight of the game ball without requiring any other motive power such as electric power.

(8) After the player finishes playing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player may play the game using the right-handed route until he or she has played the game 100 times (until the player is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode). By letting a game ball enter the operating port 37, a game round can be executed. After that, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, so the player can complete the game by allowing the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state until the player plays 100 games. If the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed hitting route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player will change the gaming state to the open/close execution mode by the time he/she plays the 100th game. You can play the game in hopes of making the transition.

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a front view of a game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 was provided with the croon 53 provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. Then, the game ball enters the hole 533A of the croon 53, falls downward, and is guided to the non-motorized accessory 51 via the communication passage 535, causing the non-motorized accessory 51 to shift from the closed state to the open state. I was letting it happen. Further, the game balls that entered the holes 533B and 533C of the croon 53 and fell downward were discharged to the game area via the discharge passage 536.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game board 31 includes a croon 53C provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, as shown in FIG. All the game balls that enter any of the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 51) of the croon 53C shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. different from.

FIG. 51 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the croon seen from above.
As shown in FIG. 51, the croon 53C includes a disc-shaped rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525, and a disc-shaped rolling surface 531 provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 531. A side wall 532 is provided.
Note that the guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from its center, and has three holes 533A to 533C formed at equal intervals from each other; The protrusion 534 has three side surfaces that slope downward toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is sloped downward from the side wall 532 toward the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C (Fig. (See middle arrow A).

Each hole 533A to 533C is provided with a detection sensor 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40i to 40k is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533C. Detects the entry of game balls. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when balls enter each of the holes 533A to 533C, unlike when balls enter various winning holes. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be of any type as long as they can individually detect winnings of game balls, and for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors may be used.

Each of the holes 533A to 533C serves as an opportunity to start a round game when the player wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery, and after transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Specifically, when a ball enters the hole 533A, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing a 16-round game, so it starts executing a 16-round game in the hole 533A. Marks are displayed around the hole 533A to suggest this.
Furthermore, when a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing four round games. The mark is not displayed to suggest that it is.

In addition, the croon 53C has a communication path 535 that guides the game balls to the non-electric accessory 51, and a guide path 539 that guides the game balls that have entered the holes 533A to 533C and fallen downward to the communication path 535. We are prepared.
The guideway 539 includes three upstream guideways 539A connected to each hole 533A to 533C, and a downstream guideway 539B connected to each of the upstream guideways 539A and to the communication passage 535. We are prepared.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the clone 53C selects game balls flowing down the gaming area based on the results of the internal lottery performed based on the entry of game balls into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry means for shifting the non-electric accessory 51 from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball.

Further, the croon 53C includes holes 533B, 533C (first ball entry portion) and a hole 533A (second ball entry portion) into which the game balls entered in the croon 53C enter. This croon 53C has a rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball that has entered the croon 53C, and a first ball entering section and a second ball entering section are provided on the rolling surface 531, and A game ball rolling on a moving surface 531 is entered.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53, and allow the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 531 to enter. . On the other hand, the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section are configured to, for example, distribute game balls that have entered the variable ball entering means to the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the probabilities of distributing game balls to the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section by the distribution mechanism may be the same or may be different. In short, the variable ball entry means only needs to include a first ball entry section and a second ball entry section.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A are the 16 round execution gates that start the execution of 16 round games. Further, each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games. Therefore, the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B, 533C. It gives value to players.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (four times in this embodiment) when a game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. A game in the opening/closing execution mode in which game balls can be paid out is started, and when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed more than a predetermined number of times (in the present embodiment). 16 times), a game in an opening/closing execution mode is started in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when a game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A can be performed by setting the number of openings and closings of the variable prize winning device 38, so that each hole 533B, 533C The player is given a higher value than the opening/closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the hole, but for example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, A higher value may be given to the player than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game ball. In short, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section is the same as the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is sufficient to provide the player with a higher value than the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the hole 533A is used as a 16-round execution gate that starts execution of 16 round games, and each hole 533B, 533C is used as a 4-round execution gate that starts execution of 4 round games, and each hole The correspondence between 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between each of the holes 533A to 533C and the 16th round execution gate and the 4th round execution gate does not have to be fixed; for example, the correspondence may be changed based on the results of an internal lottery. You can. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the gameplay and increase the attention of the players to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the starting ball entry means includes an upper operating port 36 (first starting ball entering section) and a lower operating port 37 (second starting ball entering section).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed hitting route (first route) in which a game ball is more likely to enter the upper operating port 36 and less likely to enter the lower operating port 37; It is provided with a right-handed hitting route (second route) in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the operating port 37, and it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed hitting route.

The main controller 60 also operates in a low-frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of a ball entering the lower operating port 37 is lower than that of the upper operating port 36, and a It has a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, the main controller 60 switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is a "clearly small round high certainty result" or "most advantageous result", the main controller 60 continues the high-frequency support mode at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the winning/failure lottery. . In addition, if the game result is a "low-probability result", the main controller 60 switches from the high-frequency support mode after executing the game (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment). Switch to infrequent support mode.

Therefore, if the game result is a "highly certain result for a few rounds" or "the most advantageous result", the player will win a "big hit" at least in the lottery after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Until now, a game round can be executed by letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, if the game result is a "low-probability result", after the player finishes playing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player will not be able to play until he has played the game 100 times (from the high-frequency support mode to Until switching to the low-frequency support mode), a game round can be executed by letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. After that, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, so the player can complete the game by allowing the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-motorized accessory 51 is placed in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-motorized accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state until the player plays the game 100 times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed hitting route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player will change the gaming state to the open/close execution mode by the time he/she plays the 100th game. You can play the game in hopes of making the transition.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times and a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, thereby distinguishing between a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. However, by setting game states other than these, it is also possible to create a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. .

According to this embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The player is provided with a croon 53C, and the croon 53C starts the game in the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball enters the ball. By letting the ball enter, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started. Furthermore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is moved from the closed state to the open state by entering a game ball into the croon 53C, the player can change the gaming state to the next opening/closing state using the main control device 60. After shifting to the execution mode, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by letting a game ball enter the non-electric accessory 51. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is better than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B, 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting a game in the opening/closing execution mode by letting the game ball enter the clone 53C. . Furthermore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is moved from the closed state to the open state by entering a game ball into the croon 53C, the player can change the gaming state to the next opening/closing state using the main control device 60. By entering the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 after shifting to the execution mode, the player receives a higher value than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. It is possible to start the game in the opening/closing execution mode provided. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) Entering the game balls into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start a game in the opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the entry of the game balls into the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A. Entering a ball can be performed by starting a game in an opening/closing execution mode in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, or by starting a game in an opening/closing execution mode that starts when a game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. Since this also provides a high value to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting a game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(4) The game state transition process is an opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. By starting the game and setting the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 to be more than a predetermined number of times when the game balls enter the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, more than the predetermined number of game balls can be received. Since the game starts in the opening/closing execution mode in which game balls can be paid out, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(5) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53C, the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball that enters the croon 53C. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.
(6) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball with each plate-shaped body 513, and the closed state by receiving the game ball with each lower blade member 515. Since the game ball changes from the state to the open state, it is possible to change the open/close state using only the weight of the game ball without requiring any other motive power such as electric power.

(7) After the player finishes playing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player cannot play the game using the right-handed route until he/she plays the 100th game (until the player is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode). By letting a game ball enter the operating port 37, a game round can be executed. After that, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, so the player can complete the game by allowing the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-motorized accessory 51 is placed in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-motorized accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state until the player plays the game 100 times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed hitting route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player will change the gaming state to the open/close execution mode by the time he/she plays the 100th game. You can play the game in hopes of making the transition.

[Fifth embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 52 is a front view of a game board according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has a non-electric accessory 51, and this non-electric accessory 51 is provided on the lower right side of the general winning opening 35. Further, the game ball that entered the hole 533A of the croon 53 and fell downward was guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication passage 535.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game board 31 has a croon 53D and a non-electric accessory 57, as shown in FIG. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is provided on the upper side. Further, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53D and falls downward is guided to the non-electric accessory 57 via the communication passage 535D, which is different from the first embodiment.

The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings in the game area that are formed to penetrate in the front and rear direction by being router-processed. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning opening 35 provided at each opening, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry part) 36, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry part) 37, a variable winning apparatus 38, It has an outlet 39 and a non-electric accessory 57. This non-electric accessory 57 is provided above the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. Furthermore, the game board 31 has an opening 313 provided on the lower right side of the general winning opening 35. The game board 31 also includes through gates 41 provided on the left side of the center and on the right side of the center, a main display device 42 provided on the right side of the top, and a variable display unit 43 provided in the center. have. Furthermore, the game board 31 has various members (accessories) such as a large number of nails 44 and a windmill installed in the game area in order to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls. ing.

The non-electric accessory 57 is provided on the right side of the game area of the game board 31. Further, the non-electric accessory 57 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40f is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Note that, when a ball enters the non-electric accessory 57, the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize ball, unlike when a ball enters any of the various winning holes. This non-electric accessory 57 will be explained in detail later.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 arranged to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper part of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge out toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is reduced due to the falling of the game balls. The structure is as follows.

The center frame 48 includes four first holding lamp parts 49a provided in an area above the symbol display device 47, and four second holding lamp parts 49b provided in an area on the right side of the first holding lamp part 49a. , and four third holding lamp sections 49c provided in an area above the first holding lamp section 49a.
The center frame 48 also includes a right variable entry mechanism 52 provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 47, a croon 53D provided in an area to the left of the right variable entry mechanism 52, and a symbol display. A guide mechanism 58 provided in the upper right area of the device 47 is provided.

The right variable ball entry mechanism 52 allows the game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and then discharges them to the croon route that guides them to the croon 53D and to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. It has a function of guiding the game ball entered into the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the croon route or the ejection route by switching between the ejection route and the ejection route.
The player sets the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 27 to the maximum and hits the ball to the right, changing the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 etc. (right-handed hitting route).

The clone 53D has substantially the same configuration as the first embodiment except for the communication passage 535.
Specifically, the croon 53D is connected to a hole 533A formed on the front side (front side) of the game board 31, and the game ball that enters the hole 533A and falls downward is transferred to the non-electric accessory 57. It is provided with a communication passage 535D that guides the user.

The guide mechanism 58 has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the non-electric accessory 57. Specifically, the guide mechanism 58 has a passage divided by two guide rails that are curved from the upper part of the game area to the non-electric accessory 57, and a plurality of guide rails are provided in the passage. The width is such that game balls cannot pass through at the same time.
In addition, the player makes the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 27 a little weaker than the maximum, hits the ball to the right, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side where the exit part of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting the game ball from the ball to the opposite side, the game ball can be guided into the guide mechanism 58 by reaching the entrance 58A of the guide mechanism 58 (weak hitting route).

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIG. 53(A) is a diagram of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 53(B) is a diagram of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 viewed from the side. This is a diagram.
As shown in FIG. 53, the non-electric accessory 57 is fixed to a pair of blade members 571 that are horizontally opposed to each other, and to the lower end of each blade member 571, and is connected to the board surface of the game board 31. It includes a pair of rotating shafts 572 rotatably provided around orthogonal axes, and a pair of fan-shaped gears 573 concentrically fixed to each rotating shaft 572.

In the closed state of the non-electric accessory 57, each blade member 571 has opposing surfaces 571A that face each other in the horizontal direction and are arranged along the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. 53(A). Moreover, each blade member 571 is provided in the game area (the front side of the game board 31), as shown in FIG. 53(B).
Each blade member 571 is provided so that a passage 571B formed between each opposing surface 571A has a width that does not allow a plurality of game balls to pass through at the same time. Further, the non-electric accessory 57 includes a baffle plate 57A provided above the entrance of the passage 571B. The distance between the upper end of each blade member 571 and the baffle plate 57A is narrower than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the non-electric accessory 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B when the non-electric accessory 57 is in the closed state.

Among the blade members 571, the left blade member 571 when viewed from the front side has a shaft body 571C formed to have a central axis perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 31.
The non-electric accessory 57 includes a cover 574 provided in the game area so as to cover each blade member 571 and the passage 571B.

In addition, the non-electric accessory 57 has a cylindrical first arm portion 575A that contacts the shaft body 571C from above, supports this first arm portion 575A, and is centered around an axis perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 31. A pair of rotary shafts 575B are rotatably provided as a rotary shaft, and a fan-shaped gear 575C is fixed to the rotary shafts 575B.
Furthermore, the non-electric accessory 57 supports a fan-shaped gear 576A provided to mesh with the gear 575C, supports this gear 576A, and is rotatable about an axis perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 31. It includes a pair of rotation shafts 576B and a second arm portion 576C fixed to the rotation shafts 576B.

The second arm portion 576C is provided at a position to receive the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53D, falls downward, and is discharged from the discharge port formed below the communication passage 535D.
Therefore, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the clone 53D, falls downward, and is guided to the non-electric accessory 57 via the communication passage 535D, as shown in FIG. It falls towards 576C.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the non-motorized accessory when a ball enters the 16th round execution gate. Specifically, FIG. 54(A) is a diagram of the internal structure of the non-motorized accessory 57 seen from the front side, and FIG. 54(B) is a diagram of the internal structure of the non-motorized accessory 57 seen from the side. This is a diagram.
The game ball falling toward the second arm 576C rotates the gear 576A and the second arm 576C about the rotation axis 576B, as shown by the arrow in FIG.
In addition, after rotating the second arm 576C, the game ball that fell toward the second arm 576C passes along the second arm 576C and enters the discharge passage 577 using the slope of the second arm 576C. Enter the ball. This discharge passage 577 discharges the game balls into the game area through the opening 313 (see FIG. 52).

Further, since the rotation shaft 575B and the gear 575C rotate as the gear 576A rotates, the first arm portion 575A rotates as the gear 575C rotates. The first arm portion 575A then pushes the shaft body 571C downward. Each blade member 571 rotates about a pair of rotation shafts 572 via a pair of gears 573 by pushing down a shaft 571C with a first arm 575A. As a result, the non-electric accessory 57 transitions from the closed state to the open state.

Here, the non-electric accessory 57 is equipped with a non-electric accessory opening detection sensor 519 that detects transition from the closed state to the open state, similarly to the non-electric accessory 51 in the first embodiment. . Note that the non-electric accessory opening detection sensor 519 may be of any type as long as it can detect the opening of the non-electric accessory 57, and for example, a contact type sensor can be adopted. .
The distance between the upper end of each blade member 571 and the baffle plate 57A is wider than one game ball when the non-electric accessory 57 is in the open state. Therefore, the game ball can enter the non-electric accessory 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B when the non-electric accessory 57 is in the open state.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the non-motorized accessory when a ball enters the non-motorized accessory. Specifically, FIG. 55(A) is a diagram of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 55(B) is a diagram of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 viewed from the side. This is a diagram.
As shown by the arrows in FIG. 55, the game balls that have fallen toward the non-electric accessory 57 via the guide mechanism 58 travel along the right opposing surface 571A when viewed from the front side, and fall to each other. The center position of the opposing surface 571A is reached.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the non-motorized accessory after a ball enters the non-motorized accessory. Specifically, FIG. 56(A) is a diagram of the internal structure of the non-motorized accessory 57 seen from the front side, and FIG. 56(B) is a diagram of the internal structure of the non-motorized accessory 57 seen from the side. This is a diagram.
The game ball that has reached the center position of the opposing surface 571A falls downward while rotating each blade member 571, as shown by the arrow in FIG. Specifically, each blade member 571 rotates around a pair of rotation shafts 572 via a pair of gears 573.
Note that the game balls that fall downward while rotating each blade member 571 enter the discharge communication passage 578. This discharge communication passage 578 guides the game ball to the aforementioned discharge passage 577, and the discharge passage 577 discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 313 (see FIG. 52).

Further, among the blade members 571, the left blade member 571 when viewed from the front side pushes up the shaft body 571C upward, and also pushes up the first arm portion 575A upward. The rotation shaft 575B and the gear 575C rotate as the first arm 575A rotates.

Further, since the gear 576A and the rotation shaft 576B rotate as the gear 575C rotates, the second arm portion 576C rotates as the gear 576A rotates. The second arm portion 576C then rises and returns to its original position. As a result, the non-electric accessory 57 transitions from the open state to the closed state.

The non-electric accessory 57 is an opportunity to start a round game when the player wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery and, after transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, a ball enters the non-electric accessory 57, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Here, entry of the ball into the non-electric accessory 57 is determined by detecting whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge passage 577 using the detection sensor 40f. In other words, when the non-electric accessory 57 is in the open state, a game ball that enters the non-electric accessory 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B, and when the non-electric accessory 57 is closed, the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 through the communication passage 535D. Both of the game balls guided to the non-electric accessory 57 are determined to have entered the non-electric accessory 57.

Specifically, when a ball enters the non-motorized accessory 57, the pachinko machine 10 starts playing a 16-round game. The characters "16R" indicating the start of the game are displayed (see FIG. 52).
In addition, in this embodiment, the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A that start the execution of 16 round games are referred to as 16 round execution gates, and the holes 533B and 533C that start the execution of 4 round games are referred to as 16 round execution gates. It is called a round execution gate, and the 16 round execution gate and the 4 round execution gate are also collectively referred to as the round game execution gate.

In this way, the non-electric accessory 57 has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which it does not allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter. It functions as an opening/closing ball entering means that shifts from an open state to a closed state based on the ball entering.
The non-electric accessory 57 includes each blade member 571 (first receiving portion) that receives the game ball that has entered the non-electric accessory 57, and a second arm portion 576C (which receives the game ball that has entered the hole 533A). By receiving the game ball with each wing member 571, the state changes from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball with the second arm part 576C, the state changes from the closed state to the open state. transition to the state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening/closing ball entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball in the first receiving part, and changes to the closed state by receiving the game ball in the second receiving part. It was transitioning from a state to an open state. On the other hand, the opening/closing ball entry means includes, for example, a drive unit that sets the opening/closing ball entry means to either a closed state or an open state, and a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball. The drive unit may shift the opening/closing ball entry means from the open state to the closed state based on the detection of the entry of the ball. In short, the opening/closing ball entry means has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area is not allowed to enter, and an open state based on the entry of a game ball. It is only necessary to move from the state to the closed state.

In addition, the croon 53D allows the game ball that has entered the croon 53D to enter the hole 533B, 533C (the first A hole 533A (second ball entry part) and a hole 533A (second ball entry part) that allows the game ball that enters the clown 53D to enter, and transitions the non-electric accessory 57 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. Department). In addition, the croon 53D has a rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball that has entered the croon 53D, and the first ball entrance part and the second ball entrance part are provided on the rolling surface 531, and A game ball rolling on a rolling surface 531 is entered.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53D, and allow the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 531 to enter. . On the other hand, the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section are configured to, for example, distribute game balls that have entered the variable ball entering means to the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the probabilities of distributing game balls to the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section by the distribution mechanism may be the same or may be different. In short, the variable ball entry means only needs to include a first ball entry section and a second ball entry section.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A are the 16 round execution gates that start the execution of 16 round games. Further, each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games. Therefore, the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B, 533C. It gives value to players.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (four times in this embodiment) when a game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. A game in the opening/closing execution mode in which game balls can be paid out is started, and when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A, the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed more than a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment). 16 times), a game in an open/close execution mode is started in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when a game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A can be performed by setting the number of openings and closings of the variable prize winning device 38, so that each hole 533B, 533C This gives the player a higher value than the opening/closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the hole, but for example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, A higher value may be given to the player than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game ball. In short, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section is the same as the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is sufficient to provide the player with a higher value than the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the hole 533A is used as a 16-round execution gate that starts execution of 16 round games, and each hole 533B, 533C is used as a 4-round execution gate that starts execution of 4 round games, and each hole The correspondence between 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between each of the holes 533A to 533C and the 16th round execution gate and the 4th round execution gate does not have to be fixed; for example, the correspondence may be changed based on the results of an internal lottery. You can. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the gameplay and increase the attention of the players to the game.

In this embodiment, the starting ball entry means includes an upper operating port 36 (first starting ball entering section) and a lower operating port 37 (second starting ball entering section).
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed hitting route (first route) in which a game ball is more likely to enter the upper operating port 36 and less likely to enter the lower operating port 37; It is provided with a right-handed hitting route (second route) in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the operating port 37, and it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. The non-electric accessory 57 is arranged on a weak hitting route (third path) that is different from the left hitting route and the right hitting route.

The main controller 60 also operates a low-frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of a ball entering the lower operating port 37 is lower than that of the upper operating port 36, and It has a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, the main controller 60 switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is a "highly certain result in a few rounds" or a "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high-frequency support mode at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery. . In addition, if the game result is a "low-probability result", the main controller 60 switches from the high-frequency support mode after executing a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of the game (internal lottery). Switch to infrequent support mode.

Therefore, if the game result is a "highly certain result for a few rounds" or "the most advantageous result", the player will win a "big hit" at least in the lottery after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Until now, a game round can be executed by letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, if the game result is a "low-probability result", after the player finishes playing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player will not be able to play until he has played the game 100 times (from the high-frequency support mode to Until switching to the low-frequency support mode), a game round can be executed by letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. After that, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, so the player can complete the game by allowing the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. can be executed. In addition, since the non-electric accessory 57 is arranged in a weak hitting route, the player can launch the game ball in a different route than when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. This allows the game ball to enter the non-electric accessory 57. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 57 is arranged in a weak hitting route, the player can move the non-electric accessory 57 from the closed state to the open state until the player plays the game 100 times. In addition, the game ball will not enter the non-electric accessory 57 even if the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the non-electric accessory 57 does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times and a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, thereby distinguishing between a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. However, by setting game states other than these, it is also possible to create a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. .

According to this embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The player is provided with a clown 53D, and the clown 53D starts the game in the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball enters the ball. By letting the ball enter, the game in the open/close execution mode can be started. Furthermore, when the non-electric accessory 57 is moved from the closed state to the open state by entering a game ball into the clown 53D, the player can change the gaming state to the next opening/closing state using the main control device 60. After shifting to the execution mode, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by letting a game ball enter the non-electric accessory 57. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game. In addition, since the non-electric accessory 57 is arranged in a weak hitting route, the player can cause the game ball to be launched in a different route than when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. By doing so, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the non-electric accessory 57. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(2) After the player finishes playing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player cannot play the game using the right-handed route until the player has played the game 100 times (until the player is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode). By letting a game ball enter the operating port 37, a game round can be executed. After that, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, so the player can complete the game by allowing the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. can be executed. In addition, since the non-electric accessory 57 is arranged in a weak hitting route, the player can move the non-electric accessory 57 from the closed state to the open state until the player plays the game 100 times. In addition, the game ball will not enter the non-electric accessory 57 even if the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, since the non-electric accessory 57 does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(3) The game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A is better than the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B, 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting a game in the opening/closing execution mode by entering the game ball into the clone 53D. . In addition, when the non-electric accessory 57 is moved from the closed state to the open state by entering the game ball into the clown 53D, the player can change the gaming state using the main control device 60 for the next opening/closing. By entering the game ball into the non-electric accessory 57 after shifting to the execution mode, the player receives a higher value than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. It is possible to start the game in the opening/closing execution mode provided. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) Entering the game balls into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start a game in the opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the entry of the game balls into the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A. Entering a ball can be performed by starting a game in an opening/closing execution mode in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, or by starting a game in an opening/closing execution mode that starts when a game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. Since this also provides a high value to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting a game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(5) The game state transition process is an opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. By starting the game and setting the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 to be more than the predetermined number of times when the game balls enter the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A, more than the predetermined number of game balls can be received. Since the game starts in the opening/closing execution mode in which game balls can be paid out, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(6) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53D, the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball that enters the croon 53D. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.
(7) The non-electric accessory 57 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball with each blade member 571, and changes from the closed state by receiving the game ball with the second arm portion 576C. Since the game moves to the open state, it is possible to change the open and close state using only the weight of the game ball without requiring any other power such as electric power.

[Sixth embodiment]
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described below based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 57 is an enlarged view of the croon according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention viewed from above.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes the croon 53, and when the ball enters the hole 533A of the croon 53, the execution of the 16 round game is started, and the ball enters the hole 533B of the croon 53, When a ball enters 533C, execution of a four-round game has started. In other words, the number of executions of the round game was associated with each of the holes 533A to 533C of the clone 53.
On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the game board 31 includes a croon 53E, and the number of round game executions is not associated with each of the holes 533A to 533C of the croon 53E. .

As shown in FIG. 57, the croon 53E includes a disc-shaped rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball guided to the croon 53E via the guide rail 525, and a disc-shaped rolling surface 531 provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 531. A side wall 532 is provided.
Note that the guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from its center, and has three holes 533A to 533C formed at equal intervals from each other; The projecting portion 534 has three side surfaces 534A to 534C that slope downward toward the 533C side. The hole 533A is formed at the boundary between the rolling surface 531 and the side surface 534A of the protrusion 534. The hole 533B is formed at the boundary between the rolling surface 531 and the side surface 534B of the protrusion 534. The hole 533C is formed at the boundary between the rolling surface 531 and the side surface 534C of the protrusion 534. Further, the rolling surface 531 is sloped downward from the side wall 532 toward the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the croon 53E via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

Each hole 533A to 533C is provided with a detection sensor 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40i to 40k is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533C. Detects the entry of game balls. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when balls enter each of the holes 533A to 533C, unlike when balls enter various winning holes. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be of any type as long as they can individually detect winnings of game balls, and for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors may be used.

Each of the holes 533A to 533C serves as an opportunity to start a round game when the player wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in an internal lottery, and after transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

In addition, the croon 53E is connected to a hole 533A formed on the front side (front side) of the game board 31, and the game ball that enters the hole 533A and falls downward as shown by arrow B in the figure. It is connected to a communication passage 535 that guides the non-electric accessory 51 (see FIG. 5) to two holes 533B and 533C formed on the back side (back side) of the game board 31, and is connected to the arrow C in the figure. As shown, a discharge passage 536 is provided for discharging the game balls that have entered the holes 533B, 533C and fallen downward into the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 2).

Side surfaces 534A to 534C of the protrusion 534 are made of transparent resin. The protrusion 534 also connects three two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 provided vertically below each of the side surfaces 534A to 534C, and an LED drive unit 534D that independently drives each of the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1. We are prepared. The LED drive unit 534D can cause each of the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red or blue light by driving each of the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1, and in turn causes each side surface 534A to 534C to emit red or blue light. be able to.

<Electrical configuration of audio emission control device 90 and display control device 100>
FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 58, the audio emission control device 90 includes an audio emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the audio emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a nonvolatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to retain the stored information. It is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60, as described above. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp sections 23, 49a to 49c, the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1, the speaker section 24, and the display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp sections 23, 49a to 49c, the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1, and the speaker section 24 based on commands sent from the main control device 60.
Furthermore, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100. Note that the audio light emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a program ROM 103, a work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. Note that the MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

The MPU 102 analyzes commands sent from the audio emission control device 90, performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the commands, and controls the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating commands for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a nonvolatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103, and is a volatile memory that requires external power supply to retain the stored information. It is a means of storage.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 47. Since the VDP 105 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be said to be a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 102, and stores this image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 47. This character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the display contents of the symbol display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 107.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main control device 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the winning process and the round number setting process for the round game execution gate are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the winning process and the round number setting process for the round game execution gate in this embodiment will be explained.

<Winning process for round game execution gate>
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for the round game execution gate.
In the winning process for the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes steps S201E to S204, as shown in FIG.

In step S201E, the MPU 62 determines whether a game ball has entered the 16th round execution gate. In this embodiment, the non-electric accessory 51 and each hole 533A to 533C set as a 16 round execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C are referred to as a 16 round execution gate (round game execution gate), and the MPU 62 , by determining whether each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the 16th round execution gate has detected the entry of a game ball, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the 16th round execution gate. In addition, in the round number setting process described later, the MPU 62 sets each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to each of the holes 533A to 533C to the 16 round execution gate.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S201E that the game ball has entered the 16th round execution gate, it sets a 16th round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S202. This 16th round execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the 16th round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201E that no game ball has entered the 16th round execution gate, in step S203E, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the 4th round execution gate. Determine. In this embodiment, among the holes 533A to 533C, the holes 533A to 533C set as the 4th round execution gate are referred to as 4th round execution gates (round game execution gates), and the MPU 62 is configured to correspond to the 4th round execution gate. By determining whether each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k has detected the entry of a game ball, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the fourth round execution gate. In addition, in the round number setting process to be described later, the MPU 62 sets each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to each of the holes 533A to 533C as a four-round execution gate.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S203E that the game ball has entered the 4th round execution gate, it sets a 4th round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S204. This 4th round execution flag is a flag for specifying that the ball has entered the 4th round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S203E that the game ball has not entered the 4th round execution gate, the MPU 62 does not execute the process from step S204 onwards, and instead enters the winning ball for the round game execution gate. Finish the process.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the round number setting process.
In the round number setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1012 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. Note that this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 60, the MPU 62 executes step S1013E after executing step S1001 and before executing step S1002.
In step S1013E, the MPU 62 executes a round game execution gate setting process.
The setting process for the round game execution gate will be described in detail below.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the setting process for the round game execution gate.
In the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1701E to S1703E, as shown in FIG. 61.
In step S1701E, the MPU 62 executes a lottery process for the round game execution gate. Specifically, in the round game execution gate lottery process, the MPU 62 performs a lottery to determine whether or not each hole 533A to 533C is set as a 16-round execution gate at a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment). .

In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the probability of setting each of the holes 533A to 533C as a 16-round execution gate to 50%, but the probability may be greater than 50% or may be smaller than 50%. In addition, for example, when the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 62 lowers the probability of setting each hole 533A to 533C as a 16 round execution gate, and when the game result is a "most advantageous result". In this case, the probability of setting each hole 533A to 533C as a 16-round execution gate may be increased, or the probability of setting each hole 533A to 533C as a 16-round execution gate may be varied depending on other gaming conditions. good.

In step S1702E, the MPU 62 executes round game execution gate setting processing. Specifically, in the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 sets each of the holes 533A to 533C that have won the lottery process for the round game execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C as the 16th round execution gate, and Each of the holes 533A to 533C that did not win in the game execution gate lottery process is set as a 4-round execution gate.

When setting each hole 533A to 533C as a 16 round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets each detection sensor 40i to 40k corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C as a 16 round execution gate.
When setting each of the holes 533A to 533C as a 4-round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to each of the holes 533A to 533C as a 4-round execution gate.

Note that the MPU 62 causes the RAM 64 to store execution gate information regarding the relationship between each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to each of the holes 533A to 533C and the 16th round execution gate and the 4th round execution gate. Based on the execution gate information stored in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the 16th round execution gate in step S201E, and the game ball has entered the 4th round execution gate in step S203E. Determine whether or not the ball has entered the ball.

In step S1703E, the MPU 62 sets a round game execution gate command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the round game execution gate command set in step S1703E to the audio emission control device 90. This round game execution gate command includes execution gate information related to the relationship between each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C, and the 16th round execution gate and the 4th round execution gate.
Note that the audio emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the round game execution gate command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be explained in detail later.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the round games include the first specific game (4 round games) and the second specific game (16 round games) that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game. round game). Further, the round game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 is the second specific game.
In this embodiment, the second specific game is given a higher value to the player than the first specific game by varying the number of times the round game is executed. A higher value than in the first specific game may be given to the player by paying out more game balls than in the first specific game without changing the number of times. In short, the second specific game only needs to provide the player with a higher value than the first specific game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the round game execution gate lottery process, the MPU 62 selects a lottery to determine whether or not each hole 533A to 533C is set as a 16-round execution gate at a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment). Running. Then, in the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 sets each of the holes 533A to 533C that have won the lottery process for the round game execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C as the 16th round execution gate, and sets the round game execution gate. Each of the holes 533A to 533C that did not win in the lottery process is set as a 4-round execution gate. In other words, the MPU 62 selects the first specific game and the second specific game that are started when the game ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C by executing a lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game. 2 specific games are set. Then, the game state transition process starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C.

In the present embodiment, in the round game execution gate lottery process, the MPU 62 selects a lottery to determine whether or not to set each hole 533A to 533C as a 16-round execution gate at a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment). Since the rounds are being executed, the number of holes 533A to 533C set to the 16 round execution gate is 0 to 3 among the holes 533A to 533C.
On the other hand, the MPU 62 determines the number of holes 533A to 533C to be set as the 16 round execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C, and then determines the number of holes 533A to 533C to be set as the 16 round execution gate. You can. In addition, in this case, for example, if the game result is a "low probability result", the number of holes 533A to 533C to be set as the 16 round execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C is reduced, and the game If the result is the "most advantageous result", the number of holes 533A to 533C to be set as the 16 round execution gate may be increased among the holes 533A to 533C, and each Among the holes 533A to 533C, the number of holes 533A to 533C set as the 16 round execution gate may be varied.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game state transition process in the first embodiment is changed to start either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C. It consists of
On the other hand, for example, in the game state transition process in the second, fourth, and fifth embodiments, when a game ball enters each hole 533A to 533C, either the first specific game or the second specific game is executed. The game state transition process in the third embodiment may be configured to start either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters each hole 553A, 553B. It may be configured to do so.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute different processing from the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be explained.

<About the effect determination process executed by the audio emission control device 90>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the production determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes a performance determination process in order to execute a performance for the game round, a performance for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this performance determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1501 to S1518 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, after executing the process in step S1508, or when it is determined in step S1501 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes step S1508. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that step S1519E is executed before executing S1509.
In step S1519E, the MPU 92 executes round game execution gate determination processing.
The round game execution gate determination process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of round game execution gate determination processing.
In the round game execution gate determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1801E to S1803E, as shown in FIG. 63.
In step S1801E, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the round game execution gate command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1801E that the round game execution gate command has been received, in step S1802E, the MPU 92 executes a process for determining an execution gate finalization effect. In this process of determining the execution gate confirmed performance, the MPU 92 selects the content of the performance corresponding to the round game execution gate command by referring to the performance table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Furthermore, based on the content of the selected effect, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above.
Furthermore, the MPU 92 causes the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gate to emit red light based on the execution gate information of the round game execution gate command. By causing each of the side surfaces 534A to 534C to emit red light and by causing each two-color light emitting LED 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gate to emit blue light, each side surface 534A to 534C is made to emit light in red. to emit light.

In step S1803E, the MPU 92 sets an execution gate confirmation effect command related to the execution gate confirmation effect determined in the execution gate confirmation effect determination process of step S1802E. Then, the MPU 92 stores the execution gate confirmation effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This execution gate confirmation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above. Further, this execution gate confirmation production command includes execution gate information regarding the relationship between each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C, and the 16th round execution gate and the 4th round execution gate.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the execution gate confirmation effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the execution gate confirmation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the execution gate confirmation effect.

<About the flow when transitioning to opening/closing execution mode>
FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution gate confirmation effect determination process and the execution gate confirmation effect. Specifically, FIG. 64(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. FIG. 64(B) is an enlarged view of the clone 53E viewed from above.
When transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. Stops the variable display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1801E that the command for the round game execution gate has been received, so in step S1802E, the MPU 92 executes the process of determining the execution gate finalization effect. , In step S1803E, an execution gate confirmation effect command related to the execution gate confirmation effect determined in the execution gate confirmation effect determination process of step S1802E is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the execution gate confirmation effect based on the execution gate confirmation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the process of determining the execution gate finalization performance, the MPU 92 selects each hole 533A to 533C set for the 16 round execution gates based on the execution gate information of the round game execution gate command, as shown in FIG. 64(B). By causing the corresponding two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red light, each side surface 534A to 534C is caused to emit red light, and each of the two-color LEDs 534A1 corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gate 534C1 causes each side surface 534A to 534C to emit blue light.

In the example of FIG. 64, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as a 16-round execution gate, and sets each of the holes 533B and 533C as a 4-round execution gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 causes the side surface 534A to emit red light by causing the two-color LED 534A1 corresponding to the hole 533A set to the 16th round execution gate to emit red light, and also causes each of the holes 533A set to the 4th round execution gate to emit red light. By causing the two-color LEDs 534B1 and 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533B and 533C to emit blue light, the side surfaces 534B and 534C are caused to emit blue light.

In the execution gate confirmation performance, the MPU 102 displays a schematic diagram SD of the croon 53E viewed from above at the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 64(A). Then, the MPU 102 generates a schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side surface 534A to 534C of the clone 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 16th round execution gate based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation production command. The area is displayed in red, and the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side 534A to 534C of the clone 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4th round execution gate is displayed in blue. In addition, the MPU 102 displays each hole 533A corresponding to the red area by displaying the angel's line "Red is 16R, blue is 4R!" existing at the bottom right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. ~533C is a 16-round execution gate, and each hole 533A-533C corresponding to the blue area suggests to the player that it is a 4-round execution gate.

After shifting to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as a 16-round execution gate, and each hole 533B, 533C is set as a 4-round execution gate, as shown in FIG. The flow when set to is explained in detail.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not opened and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. Note that FIG. 65 shows the non-electric accessory 51 in a simplified manner at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 65(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G after executing the execution gate confirmation effect. FIGS. 65(B) and 65(C) are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the 4th round execution gate. 65(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the 16th round execution gate. FIG. 65(F) is a diagram showing the display screen G when an opening announcement performance that notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending performance.

After executing the execution gate confirmation effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening command has been received, so in step S1602 it executes the process of determining the non-opening effect, and in step S1603, A non-opening performance command related to the non-opening performance determined in the non-opening performance determination process of S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "Aim for the croon with a right-handed hit!" This suggests that the player play right-handed.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a croon route setting process in step S1005. In this Kroon route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the Kroon route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball is moved by the slope of the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by using the blade member 521a. In addition, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state to set the croon route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide path 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is moved to the guide rail 523. will be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the clone 53E via the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the croon 53E via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

If a ball enters the holes 533B, 533C (4th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that a 4th round execution command has been received, and therefore, in step S1608, the 4th round execution effect is executed. In step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round performance based on the 4-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “4R confirmed! Hit right!” in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of four round games will start.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the type of game result determined in step S1511 is determined. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the performance C1 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When a ball enters each hole 533B, 533C (fourth round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-motorized accessory 51 is not open, so the non-motorized accessory 51 is used as the ending performance. A normal performance in which the player is not notified of the opening of 51 is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 65(C). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has entered the high-probability mode.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16th round execution command has been received, so in step S1611 A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16 round execution effect command related to the 16 round execution effect determined in the 16 round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round performance based on the 16-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “16R confirmed! Hit right!” in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of 16 round games will start. In addition, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53E, falls downward, and is guided to the non-motorized accessory 51 via the communication passage 535 moves the non-motorized accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. let

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510, so in step S1511, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the type of game result determined in step S1511 is determined. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects performance C2 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When a ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-motorized accessory 51 is open, so the non-motorized accessory 51 is displayed as an ending effect. Select an opening announcement effect to notify the player of the opening. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 65(E). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has entered the high-probability mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, ``The next jackpot is guaranteed to be 16R by hitting left!'' , the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is announced to the player.

FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating another example of the execution gate confirmation effect determination process and the execution gate confirmation effect. Specifically, FIG. 66(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. FIG. 66(B) is an enlarged view of the croon 53E viewed from above.
When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. Stops the variable display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1801E that the command for the round game execution gate has been received, so in step S1802E, the MPU 92 executes the process of determining the execution gate finalization performance. , In step S1803E, an execution gate confirmation effect command related to the execution gate confirmation effect determined in the execution gate confirmation effect determination process of step S1802E is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the execution gate confirmation effect based on the execution gate confirmation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the process of determining the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 92 selects each hole 533A to 533C set for the 16 round execution gates based on the execution gate information of the round game execution gate command, as shown in FIG. 66(B). By causing the corresponding two-color light-emitting LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red light, each side surface 534A to 534C is caused to emit red light, and the two-color light-emitting LEDs 534A1 corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gate 534C1 causes each side surface 534A to 534C to emit blue light.

In the example of FIG. 66, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as a 4-round execution gate, and sets each of the holes 533B and 533C as a 16-round execution gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 causes the side surface 534A to emit blue light by causing the two-color LED 534A1 corresponding to the hole 533A set to the 4th round execution gate to emit blue light, and also causes each of the holes 533A set to the 16th round execution gate to emit blue light. By causing the two-color LEDs 534B1 and 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533B and 533C to emit red light, the side surfaces 534B and 534C are caused to emit red light.

In the execution gate confirmation performance, the MPU 102 displays a schematic diagram SD of the croon 53E seen from above in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 66(A). Then, the MPU 102 generates a schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side surface 534A to 534C of the clone 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 16th round execution gate based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation production command. The area is displayed in red, and the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side 534A to 534C of the clone 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4th round execution gate is displayed in blue. In addition, the MPU 102 displays each hole 533A corresponding to the red area by displaying the angel's line "Red is 16R, blue is 4R!" existing at the bottom right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. ~533C is a 16-round execution gate, and each hole 533A-533C corresponding to the blue area suggests to the player that it is a 4-round execution gate.

After shifting to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as a 4-round execution gate, and each hole 533B, 533C is set as a 16-round execution gate, as shown in FIG. The flow when set to is explained in detail.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right-side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory is not opened and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Note that FIG. 67 shows the non-electric accessory 51 in a simplified manner at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 67(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G after executing the execution gate confirmation effect. FIGS. 67B and 67C are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the 16th round execution gate. FIGS. 67(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the 4th round execution gate. FIG. 67(F) is a diagram illustrating the display screen G when an opening announcement performance that notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending performance.

After executing the execution gate confirmation effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening command has been received, so in step S1602 it executes the process of determining the non-opening effect, and in step S1603, A non-opening performance command related to the non-opening performance determined in the non-opening performance determination process of S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “Aim for the croon with a right-handed shot!” present at the bottom right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. This suggests that the player should play right-handed.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a croon route setting process in step S1005. In this Kroon route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the Kroon route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball is moved by the slope of the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by using the blade member 521a. In addition, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state to set the croon route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide path 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is moved to the guide rail 523. will be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the clone 53E via the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the croon 53E via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

If a ball enters the holes 533B, 533C (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that a 16th round execution command has been received, and therefore, in step S1611, the MPU 92 executes a 16th round execution effect. In step S1612, a 16-round execution effect command related to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round performance based on the 16-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “16R confirmed! Hit right!” in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of 16 round games will start.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 67, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects performance C2 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. If a ball enters the holes 533B, 533C (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-motorized accessory 51 is not open, so the non-motorized accessory 51 is inserted as an ending effect. To select a normal performance in which the player is not notified of the opening of the game. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 67, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 67(C). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the hole 533A (4th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that the 4th round execution command has been received, so in step S1608, the MPU 92 determines that the 4th round execution command has been received. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1609, a 4 round execution effect command related to the 4 round execution effect determined in the 4 round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round performance based on the 4-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(D), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “4R confirmed! Hit right!” in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of four round games will start. Furthermore, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53E, falls downward, and is guided to the non-motorized accessory 51 via the communication passage 535 causes the non-motorized accessory 51 to shift from the closed state to the open state. let

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 67, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When a ball enters the hole 533A (fourth round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-motorized accessory 51 is open, so the non-motorized accessory 51 is displayed as an ending performance. Select an opening announcement performance that notifies players of the opening. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 67, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 67(E). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 67(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "The next jackpot is guaranteed to be 16R by hitting left!" , informs the player that the non-electric accessory 51 will be released.

As described above, in this embodiment, the hole 533A is set as the 4th round execution gate in the round game execution gate setting process of step S1013E, and when a ball enters the hole 533A, the 4th round game is executed. execution can be started, and the non-electric accessory 51 can be moved from the closed state to the open state.
On the other hand, in the round game execution gate setting process of step S1013E, the hole 533A is set as the 16th round execution gate, and when a ball enters the hole 533A, the execution of the 16th round game is started. At the same time, the non-electric accessory 51 can be moved from the closed state to the open state.
Therefore, when a player starts a round game by letting a game ball enter the hole 53E, the player expects the game ball to enter the hole 533A, and expects the start of a 16-round game. It turns out.

In addition, in this embodiment, each hole 533B, 533C is set as a 4-round execution gate in the round game execution gate setting process of step S1013E, and when a ball enters each hole 533B, 533C, 4 rounds are executed. The execution of the second round game can be started.
On the other hand, in the round game execution gate setting process of step S1013E, each hole 533B, 533C is set as a 16-round execution gate, and if a ball enters each hole 533B, 533C, 16 rounds will be played. Execution of the round game can be started.
Therefore, when a player starts a round game by inserting a game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C, he expects to start a 16-round game.

Hereinafter, the flow when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened will be described in detail.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-motorized accessory, and the right-side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-motorized accessory shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-motorized accessory is opened. Note that FIG. 68 shows the non-electric accessory 51 in a simplified manner at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 68(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G after executing the execution gate confirmation effect. FIGS. 68(B) and 68(C) are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51.

After executing the execution gate confirmation effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the opening command has been received, so in step S1605 it executes the process of determining the opening effect, and in step S1606, the MPU 92 determines that the opening effect has been received. An opening performance command related to the opening performance determined in the opening performance determination process is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the opening effect based on the opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 suggests to the player to hit the ball left-handed by displaying the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "16R confirmed by hitting left-handed!" .

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a croon route setting process in step S1005. In this Kroon route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the Kroon route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball is moved by the slope of the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by using the blade member 521a. In addition, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state to set the croon route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide path 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is moved to the guide rail 522. will be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the clone 53E via the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the croon 53E via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.
Note that when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the pachinko machine 10 executes the same process as in the case where it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened.

If a ball enters the non-motorized accessory 51 (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that a 16th round execution command has been received, so in step S1611 the MPU 92 executes 16th round execution. A performance determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16-round performance command related to the 16-round performance determined in the 16-round performance determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round performance based on the 16-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “16R confirmed! Hit right!” in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of 16 round games will start. Further, the game ball that enters the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B causes the non-electric accessory 51 to shift from the open state to the closed state.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 68, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects performance C2 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. If a ball enters the non-motorized accessory 51 (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-motorized accessory 51 is not open, so the non-motorized accessory is used as the ending performance. A normal performance in which the player is not notified of the opening of 51 is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 68, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 68(C). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode.

Here, in this embodiment, the starting ball entry means includes an upper operating port 36 (first starting ball entering section) and a lower operating port 37 (second starting ball entering section).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed hitting route (first route) in which a game ball is more likely to enter the upper operating port 36 and less likely to enter the lower operating port 37; It is provided with a right-handed hitting route (second route) in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the operating port 37, and it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed hitting route.

The main controller 60 also operates in a low-frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of a ball entering the lower operating port 37 is lower than that of the upper operating port 36, and a It has a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, the main controller 60 switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is a "clearly small round high certainty result" or "most advantageous result", the main controller 60 continues the high-frequency support mode at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the winning/failure lottery. . In addition, if the game result is a "low-probability result", the main controller 60 switches from the high-frequency support mode after executing the game (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment). Switch to infrequent support mode.

Therefore, if the game result is a "highly certain result for a few rounds" or "the most advantageous result", the player will win a "big hit" at least in the lottery after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Until now, a game round can be executed by letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, if the game result is a "low-probability result", after the player finishes playing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player will not be able to play until he has played the game 100 times (from the high-frequency support mode to Until switching to the low-frequency support mode), a game round can be executed by letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. After that, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, so the player can complete the game by allowing the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-motorized accessory 51 is placed in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-motorized accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state until the player plays the game 100 times. If the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed hitting route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 will shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player will change the gaming state to the open/close execution mode by the time he/she plays the 100th game. You can play the game in hopes of making the transition.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times and a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, thereby distinguishing between a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. However, by setting game states other than these, it is also possible to create a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. .

Here, if the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the player can cause the ball to enter each of the holes 533A to 533C of the croon 53E or enter the non-electric accessory 51. You can choose whether to generate a ball.
Therefore, for example, when the player shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when opening the non-electric accessory 51, and the game result is "clearly small round high result" or "most advantageous result", if the player By aiming to enter the 16th round execution gate or the 4th round execution gate, it is possible to continue the high probability mode while maintaining the open state of the non-electric accessory 51. After that, the player shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, and if the game result is a "low probability result", by aiming for the ball to enter the non-electric accessory 51, Since the non-motorized accessory 51 can be moved from the open state to the closed state, the player plays the game 100 times after moving the non-motorized accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. If the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by then, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed hitting route. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Furthermore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the player can determine whether or not to cause the ball to enter each of the holes 533A to 533C of the croon 53E based on the result of the execution gate confirmation effect. , it is possible to select whether to cause the ball to enter the non-electric accessory 51.
For example, the player compares the number of 16-round execution gates with the number of 4-round execution gates, and if the number of 16-round execution gates is large (see FIG. 66, for example), the player executes 16 rounds of Cloon 53E. By aiming for the ball to enter the gate or the 4th round execution gate, it is possible to aim for the ball to enter the 16th round execution gate of the croon 53E while maintaining the open state of the non-electric accessory 51. In particular, when the number of 16-round execution gates is three, that is, when the player sets all of the holes 533A to 533C as 16-round execution gates in the round game execution gate setting process of step S1013E, By aiming for the ball to enter the 16th round execution gate of the Croon 53E, it is possible to reliably aim for the ball to enter the 16th round execution gate for the Croon 53E while maintaining the open state of the non-electric accessory 51. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening/closing ball entering means transitions from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of one game ball, but it changes from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. It may transition to a closed state.
When the opening/closing ball entering means is configured in this way, for example, the player maintains the open state of the opening/closing ball entering means even after the first game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the order in which players aim at round game execution gates. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can further expand the player's options and further improve the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to being able to achieve the same actions and effects as (6) and (7) in the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can also be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Since the clone 53E is equipped with holes 533A to 533C for starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball enters, the player can change the gaming state to the opening/closing execution mode using the main control device 60. After shifting to , the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by inserting game balls into the respective holes 533A to 533C. In addition, since the hole 533A shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, the player can use the main control device 60 to shift the gaming state to the next opening/closing execution mode. After that, by letting a game ball enter the non-electric accessory 51, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening/closing execution mode includes a first specific game and a second specific game that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game, and the game state transition process is performed for each hole 533A. Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball enters the clone 533C, the player can play the game in the opening/closing execution mode by entering the game ball into the clone 53E. When starting the second specific game, the player expects the second specific game to start. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can further increase the attention of players to the game.
(3) The main control device 60 executes a lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby selecting the first specific game that is started when the game ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C. Since the second specific game and the second specific game are set, the player pays attention to the results of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(4) The game state transition process starts a first specific game that can pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts a second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. When starting a game in the opening/closing execution mode, the player expects the start of the second specific game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.
(5) The game state transition process starts a first specific game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of opening and closing times of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times, and setting the number of opening and closing times of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times. By setting the number of times to be greater than the predetermined number of times, a second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls is started, so when the player starts a game in the open/close execution mode. In this case, the player expects the start of the second specific game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.
(6) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53E, the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball that enters the croon 53E. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

[Seventh embodiment]
Hereinafter, a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the sixth embodiment, the game board 31 includes a croon 53E, and the game ball guided by the croon 53E enters one of the holes 533A to 533C, and the ball enters any of the holes 533A to 533C of the croon 53E. When a ball occurs, execution of a 16 round game or a 4 round game is started. In other words, the game balls guided by the clone 53E started playing the round game without exception.
On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment in that the game ball guided to the croon 53E does not necessarily start executing the round game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main control device 60 executes processing different from that in the sixth embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the setting process for the round game execution gate is different from that in the sixth embodiment. Below, the contents of the setting process for the round game execution gate in this embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a setting process for a round game execution gate according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention.
In the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1704F to S1703F. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the MPU 92 executes steps S1701F and S1703F instead of steps S1701E and S1703E, and executes step S1704F before executing step S1701F. Different from the embodiment.

In step S1704F, the MPU 62 executes replay gate selection processing. Specifically, in the replay gate selection process, the MPU 62 selects one of the holes 533A to 533C and sets it as the replay gate. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 selects one of the holes 533A to 533C and sets it as the replay gate, but it may select a plurality of holes and set it as the replay gate. Further, in this embodiment, the selection probabilities for each of the holes 533A to 533C are the same, but they may be different.

When setting each hole 533A to 533C as a replay gate, the MPU 62 sets each detection sensor 40i to 40k corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C as a replay gate.
Specifically, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate, the pachinko machine 10 releases the prize ball ( In this embodiment, a payout of 3 pieces is executed. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the hole 533A as the replay gate in the replay gate selection process in step S1704F, and when a ball enters the hole 533A, pays out three prize balls, If a ball enters the hole 533B or 533C, the prize ball is not paid out.

In step S1701F, the MPU 62 executes a lottery process for the round game execution gate. Specifically, in the round game execution gate lottery process, the MPU 62 performs a lottery process to determine whether or not each of the holes 533A to 533C, which have not been set as a replay gate, should be set as a 16th round execution gate. is executed with a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment).

In step S1702E, the MPU 62 executes round game execution gate setting processing. Specifically, in the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 sets each of the holes 533A to 533C that have won the lottery process of the round game execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C as the 16th round execution gate, and Each of the holes 533A to 533C that did not win in the game execution gate lottery process is set as a 4-round execution gate.

When setting each hole 533A to 533C as a 16 round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets each detection sensor 40i to 40k corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C as a 16 round execution gate.
When setting each of the holes 533A to 533C as a 4-round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to each of the holes 533A to 533C as a 4-round execution gate.

Note that the MPU 62 causes the RAM 64 to store execution gate information regarding the relationship between each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to each of the holes 533A to 533C and the replay gate, 16th round execution gate, and 4th round execution gate. Based on the execution gate information stored in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the 16th round execution gate in step S201E, and the game ball has entered the 4th round execution gate in step S203E. Determine whether or not the ball has entered the ball.

In step S1703F, the MPU 62 sets a round game execution gate command. In step S401 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the round game execution gate command set in step S1703F to the sound emission control device 90. This round game execution gate command includes execution gate information regarding the relationship between each detection sensor 40i to 40k corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C, and a replay gate, a 16th round execution gate, and a 4th round execution gate. .
Note that the audio emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the round game execution gate command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be explained in detail later.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the round games include the first specific game (4 round games) and the second specific game (16 round games) that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game. round game). Further, the round game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 is the second specific game.
In addition, in this embodiment, the second specific game is given a higher value to the player than the first specific game by varying the number of times the round game is executed. A higher value than in the first specific game may be given to the player by paying out more game balls than in the first specific game without changing the number of times. In short, the second specific game only needs to provide the player with a higher value than the first specific game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the round game execution gate lottery process, the MPU 62 selects a lottery to determine whether or not each hole 533A to 533C is set as a 16-round execution gate at a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment). Running. Then, in the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 sets each of the holes 533A to 533C that have won the lottery process for the round game execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C as the 16th round execution gate, and sets the round game execution gate. Each of the holes 533A to 533C that did not win in the lottery process is set as a 4-round execution gate. In other words, the MPU 62 selects the first specific game and the second specific game that are started when the game ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C by executing a lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game. 2 specific games are set. Then, the game state transition process starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C.

In this embodiment, in the round game execution gate lottery process, the MPU 62 selects a lottery to determine whether or not each hole 533A to 533C is set as a 16-round execution gate at a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment). Since the rounds are being executed, the number of holes 533A to 533C set to the 16 round execution gate is 0 to 2 among the holes 533A to 533C.
On the other hand, the MPU 62 determines the number of holes 533A to 533C to be set as the 16 round execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C, and then determines the number of holes 533A to 533C to be set as the 16 round execution gate. You can. In addition, in this case, for example, if the game result is a "low probability result", the number of holes 533A to 533C to be set as the 16 round execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C is reduced, and the game If the result is the "most advantageous result", the number of holes 533A to 533C to be set as the 16 round execution gate may be increased among the holes 533A to 533C, and each Among the holes 533A to 533C, the number of holes 533A to 533C set as the 16 round execution gate may be varied.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the sixth embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the process for determining the round game execution gate is different from that in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the details of the round game execution gate determination process in this embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a flowchart of round game execution gate determination processing.
In the round game execution gate determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1801E to S1803F. Note that this embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment in that the MPU 92 executes steps S1802F and S1803F instead of steps S1802E and S1803E, as shown in FIG.

In step S1801E, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the round game execution gate command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1801E that the round game execution gate command has been received, in step S1802F it executes a process for determining an execution gate finalization performance. In this process of determining the execution gate confirmed performance, the MPU 92 selects the content of the performance corresponding to the round game execution gate command by referring to the performance table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Furthermore, based on the contents of the selected effect, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above.
Furthermore, the MPU 92 causes the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gate to emit red light based on the execution gate information of the round game execution gate command. By causing each of the side surfaces 534A to 534C to emit red light and by causing each two-color light emitting LED 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gate to emit blue light, each side surface 534A to 534C is made to emit blue light. to emit light. Based on the execution gate information of the round game execution gate command, the MPU 92 prevents each of the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate from emitting light. The side surfaces 534A to 534C are prevented from emitting light.

In step S1803F, the MPU 92 sets an execution gate confirmation effect command related to the execution gate confirmation effect determined in the execution gate confirmation effect determination process of step S1802F. Then, the MPU 92 stores the execution gate confirmation effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This execution gate confirmation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above. In addition, this execution gate confirmation performance command includes execution gate information regarding the relationship between each detection sensor 40i to 40k corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C, and a replay gate, a 16th round execution gate, and a 4th round execution gate. I'm here.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the execution gate confirmation effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the execution gate confirmation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the execution gate confirmation effect.

<About the flow when transitioning to opening/closing execution mode>
FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution gate confirmation effect determination process and the execution gate confirmation effect. Specifically, FIG. 71(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. FIG. 71(B) is an enlarged view of the clone 53E viewed from above.
When transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. Stops the variable display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1801E that the command for the round game execution gate has been received, so in step S1802F, the MPU 92 executes the process of determining the execution gate finalization effect. , In step S1803F, an execution gate confirmation effect command related to the execution gate confirmation effect determined in the execution gate confirmation effect determination process of step S1802F is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the execution gate confirmation effect based on the execution gate confirmation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the process of determining the execution gate confirmation performance, the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 71(B), fills each hole 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gates based on the execution gate information of the round game execution gate command. By causing the corresponding two-color light-emitting LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red light, each side surface 534A to 534C is caused to emit red light, and the two-color light-emitting LEDs 534A1 corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gate 534C1 causes each side surface 534A to 534C to emit blue light. Then, based on the execution gate information of the round game execution gate command, the MPU 92 prevents the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate from emitting light. The side surfaces 534A to 534C are prevented from emitting light.

In the example of FIG. 71, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as a 16-round execution gate, and sets the hole 533B as a 4-round execution gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 causes the side surface 534A to emit red light by causing the two-color LED 534A1 corresponding to the hole 533A set as the 16th round execution gate to emit red light, and also causes the side surface 534A to emit red light. By causing the two-color LED 534B1 corresponding to LED 533B to emit blue light, the side surface 534B is caused to emit blue light.
Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 71, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533C as a replay gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 prevents the side surface 534C from emitting light by preventing the two-color LED 534C1 corresponding to the hole 533C set in the replay gate from emitting light.

In the execution gate confirmation performance, the MPU 102 displays a schematic diagram SD of the croon 53E viewed from above at the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 71(A). Then, the MPU 102 generates a schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side surface 534A to 534C of the clone 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 16th round execution gate based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation production command. The area is displayed in red, and the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side 534A to 534C of the clone 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4th round execution gate is displayed in blue. Furthermore, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation production command, the MPU 102 determines the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side surface 534A to 534C of the crew 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the replay gate. Display in white. In addition, the MPU 102 displays each hole 533A corresponding to the red area by displaying the angel's line "Red is 16R, blue is 4R!" existing at the bottom right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. ~533C is a 16-round execution gate, and each hole 533A-533C corresponding to the blue area suggests to the player that it is a 4-round execution gate.

Thereafter, after transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as the 16-round execution gate and the hole 533B as the 4-round execution gate, as shown in FIG. , the flow when the hole 533C is set as a replay gate will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 65. Note that regardless of the setting status of the round game execution gate or the opening status of the non-electric accessory 51, the flow when a ball enters the replay gate is the same, so the setting status of the round game execution gate, A description of the opening status of the non-electric accessory 51 will be omitted.

After executing the execution gate confirmation effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening command has been received, so in step S1602 it executes the process of determining the non-opening effect, and in step S1603, A non-opening performance command related to the non-opening performance determined in the non-opening performance determination process of S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "Aim for the croon with a right-handed hit!" This suggests that the player play right-handed.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a croon route setting process in step S1005. In this Kroon route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the Kroon route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball is moved by the slope of the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by using the blade member 521a. In addition, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state to set the croon route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide path 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is moved to the guide rail 523. will be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the clone 53E via the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the croon 53E via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

If the ball enters the hole 533B (4th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that a 4th round execution command has been received, and therefore determines the 4th round execution effect in step S1608. The process is executed, and in step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round performance based on the 4-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “4R confirmed! Hit right!” in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of four round games will start.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. If a ball enters the hole 533B (fourth round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-motorized accessory 51 is not being released, so the non-motorized accessory 51 is released as an ending effect. Select a normal effect that does not notify the player. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 65(C). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16th round execution command has been received, so in step S1611 the MPU 92 determines that the 16th round execution command has been received. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16 round execution effect command related to the 16 round execution effect determined in the 16 round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round performance based on the 16-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "16R confirmed! Hit right!" in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of 16 round games will start. Furthermore, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53E, falls downward, and is guided to the non-motorized accessory 51 via the communication passage 535 causes the non-motorized accessory 51 to shift from the closed state to the open state. let

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects performance C2 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When a ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-motorized accessory 51 is open, so the non-motorized accessory 51 is displayed as an ending performance. Select an opening announcement performance that notifies players of the opening. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 65(E). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, ``The next jackpot is guaranteed to be 16R by hitting left!'' , informs the player that the non-electric accessory 51 will be released.

When a ball enters the hole 533C (replay gate), the MPU 62 pays out three prize balls.
Furthermore, since the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, it does not execute the discharge route setting process in step S1012. Therefore, the MPU 62 maintains the state in which the plate 523a is set to the closed state and the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is set to the croon route. In other words, the game ball travels along the blade member 521a using the slope of the blade member 521a and newly enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, so the player can enter the 16th round execution gate or the 4th round execution gate. As long as the ball does not enter the round execution gate, the prize ball can be paid out.

As described above, in this embodiment, each of the holes 533A to 533C set to the 16th round execution gate and each hole 533A to 533C set to the 4th round execution gate receive the game ball that enters the clone 53E. It functions as a specific ball entry section that controls the round game based on the entry of game balls. In addition, each hole 533A to 533C set in the replay gate allows the game ball that enters the clone 53E to enter, and functions as a non-specific ball entry section that does not control the round game based on the entry of the game ball.
In this embodiment, the specific ball entering section controls the round game by starting the round game based on the entering of the game ball, and the non-specific ball entering section controls the round game based on the entering of the game ball. By not starting the game, the round play was not controlled. On the other hand, for example, the game state transition means starts a round game regardless of whether the game ball enters the specified ball entering section or the non-specific ball entering section, and the specified ball entering section The round game is controlled by shifting to the high probability mode based on the ball, and the non-specific ball entering section does not control the round game by not shifting to the high probability mode based on the ball entering the game ball. You can. In short, it is sufficient that the specific ball entry section controls the round game based on the entry of the game ball, and the non-specific ball entry section does not control the round game based on the entry of the game ball.

In addition, in this embodiment, the non-specific ball entry section is set so as not to cause the non-electric accessory 51 to shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the specific ball entry section is It is set to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball.
Further, in this embodiment, each of the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate pays out the game ball based on the entry of the game ball. In the present embodiment, each of the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate pays out the game ball based on the entry of the game ball, but it is not necessary to pay out the game ball.

According to this embodiment, the same functions and effects as (6) and (7) in the first embodiment and (4) to (6) in the sixth embodiment can be achieved. , the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Since the clone 53E is equipped with a specific ball entering section that controls the game in the opening/closing execution mode when a game ball enters the ball, the player can change the gaming state to the opening/closing execution mode using the main control device 60. After the transition, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be controlled by letting the game ball enter the specific ball entry part. Further, since the non-specific ball entry section does not control the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball, the player can enter the game ball into the clone 53E again. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(2) Since the non-specified ball entering unit executes the payout of game balls based on the ball entering, the player can enter the non-specific ball after shifting the gaming state to the opening/closing execution mode using the main controller 60. By letting the game balls enter the ball part, the number of game balls can be increased without starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.
(3) Since the specific ball entry section moves the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, the player can use the main control device 60 to control the gaming state in the next specific manner. After shifting to the state, a game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by letting a game ball enter the non-electric accessory 51. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The game in the opening/closing execution mode includes a first specific game and a second specific game that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game, and the game state transition process is Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball enters the specified ball section, the player starts the round game by entering the game ball into the specified ball section. In this case, the player expects the start of the second specific game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can further increase the attention of players to the game.
(5) The main control device 60 executes a lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby selecting the first specific game and the second specific game that are started when the game ball enters the specific ball entry section. Since the second specific game is set, the player will pay attention to the results of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the non-specific ball entry section is set so as not to cause the non-electric accessory 51 to shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the specific ball entry section is set to Although it is set to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, it may be set in the opposite relationship. Specifically, the specific ball entry section is set to prevent the non-electric accessory 51 from shifting from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the non-specific ball entry section is set to prevent the non-electric accessory 51 from transitioning from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. The non-electric accessory 51 may be set to transition from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the ball.
According to this, the non-specific ball entry section moves the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so the player can then move the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51. By letting the ball enter the ball, it is possible to start a round game without making the game ball enter the specific ball entry area. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

[Eighth embodiment]
An eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described below based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, the clone 53E has a hole 533C set as a replay gate, and when a ball enters the hole 533C, the MPU 62 pays out three prize balls. .
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a ball enters the hole 533C (replay gate), the MPU 62 performs replay gate selection processing, round game execution gate lottery processing, round game execution gate This embodiment differs from the seventh embodiment in that the setting process is re-executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main control device 60 executes processing different from that in the seventh embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the winning process and the round number setting process for the round game execution gate are different from those in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the winning process and the round number setting process for the round game execution gate in this embodiment will be explained.

<Winning processing for round game execution gate>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for the round game execution gate according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention.
In the winning process for the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes steps S201E to S206G. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, if the MPU 62 determines in step S203E that no game ball has entered the 4th round execution gate, the MPU 62 executes the processes from step S205G onward. This is different from the seventh embodiment.

In step S205G, the MPU 62 determines whether a game ball has entered the replay gate. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether a game ball has entered the replay gate by determining whether each of the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the replay gate has detected the entry of a game ball. judge.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S205G that the game ball has entered the replay gate, it sets a replay flag in the RAM 64 in step S206G. This replay flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the replay gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S205G that no game ball has entered the replay gate, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the round game execution gate without executing the processes after step S206G. finish.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the round number setting process.
In the round number setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1012 in substantially the same manner as in the seventh embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, if it is determined in step S1006 that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S1014G onwards. This is different from the seventh embodiment.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, it determines in step S1014G whether or not a replay flag is set in the RAM 64. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the replay gate after executing the croon route setting process.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1014G that the replay flag is not set in the RAM 64, it executes step S1006 again.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1014G that the replay flag is set in the RAM 64, it executes a round game execution gate setting process in step S1015G. Note that the setting process for the round game execution gate in step S1015G is similar to the setting process for the round game execution gate in step S1013E.

In step S1016G, the MPU 62 clears the replay flag stored in the RAM 64.
In step S1017G, the MPU 62 sets a gate resetting command, and then executes step S1006 again. In step S401 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the gate resetting command set in step S1017G to the audio emission control device 90.
Note that the audio emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the gate resetting command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be explained in detail later.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute different processing from the seventh embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the process for determining the round game execution gate is different from that in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the details of the round game execution gate determination process in this embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of round game execution gate determination processing.
In the round game execution gate determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1801E to S1803F. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1801E that a round game execution gate command has been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S1804G onward. This is different from the seventh embodiment.

In step S1804G, the MPU 92 determines whether the gate resetting command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S1804G that the gate resetting command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes from step S1802F onward, similarly to the seventh embodiment.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1804G that the gate resetting command has been received, in step S1805G, the MPU 92 executes a gate resetting effect determination process. In this process of determining the gate resetting effect, the MPU 92 selects the content of the effect corresponding to the gate resetting command by referring to the effect table stored in the ROM 93 in advance.

Furthermore, based on the content of the selected effect, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above.

In step S1806G, the MPU 92 sets a gate resetting effect command related to the gate resetting effect determined in the gate resetting effect determination process of step S1805G. Then, the MPU 92 stores the gate resetting effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This gate resetting effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the gate resetting effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the gate resetting effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the gate resetting effect.

<About the flow when transitioning to opening/closing execution mode>
Thereafter, after transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as the 16-round execution gate and the hole 533B as the 4-round execution gate, as shown in FIG. , the flow when the hole 533C is set as a replay gate will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 65. Note that regardless of the setting status of the round game execution gate and the opening status of the non-electric accessory 51, the flow when a ball enters the replay gate is the same, so the setting status of the round game execution gate, A description of the opening status of the non-electric accessory 51 will be omitted.

After executing the execution gate confirmation effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening command has been received, so in step S1602 it executes the process of determining the non-opening effect, and in step S1603, A non-opening performance command related to the non-opening performance determined in the non-opening performance determination process of S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "Aim for the croon with a right-handed hit!" This suggests that the player play right-handed.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a croon route setting process in step S1005. In this Kroon route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the Kroon route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball is moved by the slope of the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by using the blade member 521a. In addition, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state to set the croon route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide path 522 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is moved to the guide rail 522. will be guided to. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the clone 53E via the guide rail 525.
Thereafter, the game ball guided to the croon 53E via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

If the ball enters the hole 533B (4th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that a 4th round execution command has been received, and therefore determines the 4th round execution effect in step S1608. The process is executed, and in step S1609, a 4-round execution effect command related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the 4-round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round performance based on the 4-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line “4R confirmed! Hit right!” in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of four round games will start.

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. If a ball enters the hole 533B (fourth round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-motorized accessory 51 is not being released, so the non-motorized accessory 51 is released as an ending effect. Select a normal effect that does not notify the player. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 65(C). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16th round execution command has been received, so in step S1611 the MPU 92 determines that the 16th round execution command has been received. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16 round execution effect command related to the 16 round execution effect determined in the 16 round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round performance based on the 16-round performance command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "16R confirmed! Hit right!" in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The player is informed that the execution of 16 round games will start. Furthermore, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53E, falls downward, and is guided to the non-motorized accessory 51 via the communication passage 535 causes the non-motorized accessory 51 to shift from the closed state to the open state. let

Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c, and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Thereafter, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that an opening command has been received, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the active line L as a stop result, so the MPU 92 , it is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Furthermore, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects performance C2 as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After completing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, and therefore executes the non-electric accessory opening determination process in step S1515. When a ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-motorized accessory 51 is open, so the non-motorized accessory 51 is displayed as an ending effect. Select an opening announcement performance that notifies players of the opening. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 selects the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 65(E). By displaying the angel's line ``Probability change!'' existing in the game, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the high probability mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, ``The next jackpot is guaranteed to be 16R by hitting left!'' , informs the player that the non-electric accessory 51 will be released.

When a ball enters the hole 533C (replay gate), the MPU 62 pays out three prize balls.
Furthermore, since the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, it does not execute the discharge route setting process in step S1012. Therefore, the MPU 62 maintains the state in which the plate 523a is set to the closed state and the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is set to the croon route. In other words, the game ball travels along the blade member 521a using the slope of the blade member 521a and newly enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, so the player can enter the 16th round execution gate or the 4th round execution gate. As long as the ball does not enter the round execution gate, the prize ball can be paid out.

Furthermore, if a ball enters the hole 533C (replay gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1804G that a gate resetting command has been received, and therefore determines the gate resetting effect in step S1805G. The process is executed, and in step S1806G, a gate resetting effect command related to the gate resetting effect determined in the gate resetting effect determination process of step S1805G is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the gate resetting effect based on the gate resetting effect command transmitted from the MPU 92.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a gate resetting effect. Specifically, FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 47.
In the gate resetting performance, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 75, displays the devil's line "I'm going to shuffle the gate!" on the left side of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby starting the round game. Suggests the player to reset the execution gate and replay gate.

Thereafter, in step S1802F, the MPU 92 executes an execution gate confirmation performance determination process, and in step S1803F, the execution gate confirmation performance command related to the execution gate confirmation performance determined in the execution gate confirmation performance determination process of step S1802F. Set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the execution gate confirmation effect based on the execution gate confirmation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92.

FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating an example of the process for determining the execution gate confirmation effect and the execution gate confirmation effect after the gate resetting effect is executed. Specifically, FIG. 76(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. FIG. 76(B) is an enlarged view of the clone 53E viewed from above.

In the process of determining the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 92 selects each hole 533A to 533C set for the 16 round execution gates based on the execution gate information of the round game execution gate command, as shown in FIG. 76(B). By causing the corresponding two-color light-emitting LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red light, each side surface 534A to 534C is caused to emit red light, and the two-color light-emitting LEDs 534A1 corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gate 534C1 causes each side surface 534A to 534C to emit blue light. Then, based on the execution gate information of the round game execution gate command, the MPU 92 prevents the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate from emitting light. The side surfaces 534A to 534C are prevented from emitting light.

In the example of FIG. 76, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as a 4-round execution gate and the hole 533C as a 16-round execution gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 causes the side surface 534A to emit blue light by causing the two-color LED 534A1 corresponding to the hole 533A set as the 4th round execution gate to emit blue light, and also causes the side surface 534A to emit blue light. By causing the two-color LED 534C1 corresponding to 533C to emit red light, the side surface 534C is made to emit red light.
Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 76, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533B as a replay gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 prevents the side surface 534B from emitting light by preventing the two-color LED 534B1 corresponding to the hole 533B set in the replay gate from emitting light.

In the execution gate confirmation effect, the MPU 102 displays a schematic diagram SD of the croon 53E seen from above in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 76(A). Then, the MPU 102 generates a schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side surface 534A to 534C of the clone 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 16th round execution gate based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation production command. The area is displayed in red, and the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side 534A to 534C of the clone 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 4th round execution gate is displayed in blue. Furthermore, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation production command, the MPU 102 determines the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side surface 534A to 534C of the crew 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the replay gate. Display in white. In addition, the MPU 102 displays each hole 533A corresponding to the red area by displaying the angel's line "Red is 16R, blue is 4R!" existing at the bottom right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. ~533C is a 16-round execution gate, and each hole 533A-533C corresponding to the blue area suggests to the player that it is a 4-round execution gate.

As described above, in this embodiment, each of the holes 533A to 533C set to the 16th round execution gate and each hole 533A to 533C set to the 4th round execution gate receive the game ball that enters the clone 53E. It functions as a specific ball entry section that controls the round game based on the entry of game balls. In addition, each hole 533A to 533C set in the replay gate allows the game ball that enters the clone 53E to enter, and unlike the control of the round game by the specific ball entry section, the game ball enters the hole 533A to 533C. It functions as a non-specific ball entry section that controls round games based on the following.

In addition, in this embodiment, the non-specific ball entry section is set so as not to cause the non-electric accessory 51 to shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the specific ball entry section is It is set to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball.
Further, in this embodiment, each of the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate pays out the game ball based on the entry of the game ball. In the present embodiment, each of the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate pays out the game ball based on the entry of the game ball, but it is not necessary to pay out the game ball.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a re-lottery to select a 4-round game and a 16-round game when a game ball enters the non-specific ball entry section. A 4 round game and a 16 round game that are started when a game ball enters a ball club are reset.
In this embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a re-lottery to select a 4-round game and a 16-round game when a game ball enters the non-specific ball entry section. The ball entering section controls the round game based on the entering of the game ball, which is different from the control of the round game by the specific ball entering section, but it may also perform a control different from the re-lottery, for example. , a special performance may be performed during the round game. In short, the non-specific ball entering section may control the round game based on the entering of the game ball, unlike the control of the round game by the specific ball entering section.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same actions and effects as those of the seventh embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The main control device 60 executes a re-lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game when the game ball enters the non-specified ball entry section. Since the first specific game and the second specific game that are started when the game ball enters the ball are reset, the player can play the first specific game and the second specific game by entering the game ball into the non-specific ball entering section. The result of the lottery for selecting the second specific game can be changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the non-specific ball entry section is set so as not to cause the non-electric accessory 51 to shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the specific ball entry section is set to Although it is set to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, it may be set in the opposite relationship. Specifically, the specific ball entry section is set to prevent the non-electric accessory 51 from shifting from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the non-specific ball entry section is set to prevent the non-electric accessory 51 from transitioning from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. The non-electric accessory 51 may be set to transition from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the ball.
According to this, the non-specific ball entry section moves the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so the player can then move the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51. By letting the ball enter the ball, it is possible to start a round game without making the game ball enter the specific ball entry area. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

[Modifications of each embodiment]
Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and the present invention includes modifications, improvements, etc. within the range that can achieve the purpose of the present invention.
(1) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the grand prize opening 38a once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the big prize opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, a predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration period) has elapsed, or a game is entered into the grand prize opening 38a. When the total number of winning balls reaches a predetermined upper limit, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed depending on the upper limit duration time, and the conditions for setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again are arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, the total number of winning game balls that enter the grand prize opening 38a reaches the predetermined upper limit of 8 balls. As a result, the opening/closing door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers depending on the distribution results. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers for each round during one opening/closing execution mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total number of winning game balls to the grand prize opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state. The door 38b had been set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a termination trigger that sets the opening/closing door 38b to a closed state based on the entry of a game ball, and the termination trigger is activated when a predetermined time elapses. The ball may be configured to allow entry into the mouth.
(5) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state and then returns the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state when a predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration) elapses. It was set to . On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state and then opens the opening/closing door 38b after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since a winning in the big prize opening 38a occurred. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may move to the next round game without setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state.
(7) In each of the embodiments described above, the upper limit duration of the short time mode was set shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time that is longer than the game ball firing cycle and less than or equal to n times the game ball firing cycle (n = 1, 2, or 3). It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 had two types of opening/closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an open/close execution mode in which a round game is executed twice with an upper limit duration in a short time mode, and an open/close execution mode in which a round game is executed 4 times or 16 times in an upper limit duration in a long mode. It had a mode. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening/closing execution mode that is different from these regarding the aspect of the upper limit duration and the number of times the round game is executed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 can vary the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 38b such as half-open or fully open, instead of setting a plurality of opening/closing execution modes by varying the upper limit duration time. , a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of opening/closing execution modes are set. Further, although the upper limit duration appears to be the same to the player, the exact upper limit duration may be set to be different.

(9) In each of the embodiments described above, the game result and the performance for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one to one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from multiple types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from multiple types of effects by lottery etc. The selection rate may be set to be different depending on the game result.

(10) In each of the embodiments described above, the MPU 92 is effective when the game result is any of the "special losing result", the "unexplicitly small round high sure result", and the "clearly clear small round high sure result". Information regarding a special combination of symbols is determined as a stop result to be finally displayed on the line L, and this special combination of symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which game result it is.

(11) In each of the embodiments described above, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for drawing when a jackpot occurs, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for drawing for the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs. On the other hand, when a jackpot occurs, the MPU 62 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 for lottery of the jackpot type. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(12) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of losing results, a "special losing result" and a "normal losing result," and the MPU 62 stores the value of the random number for winning the jackpot occurrence. A lottery for occurrence of a jackpot was executed by comparing the winning/failure table and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. In other words, the MPU 62 used the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery related to the "special losing result." On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in order to execute the lottery related to the "special winning result". A lottery may be conducted based on the results.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, under the gaming state in which the winning/failure table for the low probability mode is referred to when drawing a lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, the number of random numbers that will be a "special winning result" is two, and the jackpot will occur. Under the gaming condition in which the high probability mode win/fail table is referred to when drawing the lottery, there is only one random number value that results in a "special losing result". In other words, the probability of a "specially outlier result" was set to be higher in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of a "specially outlier result" may be set lower in low probability mode than in high probability mode, and may be set to be the same in low probability mode and high probability mode. may have been done. Further, the probability of a "specially outlier result" may be set to 0 in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by setting the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the states, it is possible to create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. .

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the reservation information related to the upper operation port 36 in the first result display section retention area Ra, and stores the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 in the second result display section. By storing the reservation information in the storage area Rb, the reservation information related to the upper operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 are stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the reservation information related to the upper operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 together.
(16) In each of the embodiments described above, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 for use in playing the game, regardless of whether there is reservation information related to the upper operation port 36. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the reservation information related to the upper operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 for use in the game round in the winning order of the respective reservation information.

(17) In each of the embodiments described above, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the audio emission control device 90, and the audio emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 was controlled by. In response, the main control device 60 sends a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 analyzes the command and sends a command to the sound light emission control device 90, thereby controlling the sound light emission. Control of the device 90 may also be performed. Note that the commands sent from the main control device 60 to the audio emission control device 90 and the commands sent from the audio emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in each of the above embodiments, but are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 was equipped with the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the sound light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the sound light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60.

(19) In each of the embodiments described above, the symbol display device 47 is configured to periodically scroll the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on a winning in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, a game replay effect was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect of the game replay is not limited to the effects described in each of the above embodiments, but is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may perform a performance for a game round by operating a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may perform a performance for a game round by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may perform a game replay by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 47.

(20) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and distribution lottery) based on winnings in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, and then the main display section 45 The symbol display device 47 executes a variable display, and displays the result of an internal lottery conducted based on winnings in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after starting the variable display The results may be displayed. In this case, after starting the fluctuating display and before stopping the fluctuating display, an internal lottery may be executed and settings such as a stop result etc. may be executed.

(21) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main display section 45, which executes the fluctuating display of symbols and displays the result of the internal lottery as a result of stopping the fluctuating display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display section 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the internal lottery result, and by randomly displaying the stop result, the main display section 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display. The lottery results may be made indistinguishable. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not need to include the main display section 45.

(22) In each of the embodiments described above, the symbol display device 47 is configured to periodically scroll the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, a game replay effect was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may perform a game repeat effect on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (picture) that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 47 may set a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When setting and stopping the variable display of the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, a symbol clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols displayed in this predetermined area may be displayed in a variable manner or may not be displayed during the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the symbols displayed in the predetermined area may be characters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to identify, or may be a combination of these. Furthermore, even if the characters, colors, and patterns are not difficult for the player to identify, mutually similar designs or combinations thereof may be used to make the characters difficult for the player to identify. According to this, for example, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually check the symbol display device 47 without checking the main display section 45 at the end of a game round, in the same way as when winning a jackpot lottery. It is possible to easily check whether or not a fraudulent act is being carried out to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the following behavior.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 was configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a gaming machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine, and information on this optical code is transmitted to a camera installed in a mobile phone, etc. The gaming machine may be configured so that information about the gaming machine can be transmitted to a web server by capturing and reading an image and accessing a website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the player can receive information from the web server by inputting the password issued by accessing the website into the gaming machine by operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine. You may.

(24) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 has been described as an example of the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that releases an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates the right to win a jackpot when a game ball enters a specific area. Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of gaming machine such as an arrangement ball machine or a mahjong ball machine.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52 has a croon route that guides the game ball flowing down the gaming area to the croon 53 after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and a right side variable ball entry mechanism 52. It had a function of guiding the game balls entered into the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the croon route or the ejection route by switching between the discharge route and the discharge route to the outside of the variable ball entry mechanism 52. On the other hand, for example, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 allows the game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and then discharges an execution gate route that guides it to the 4th round execution gate. It may be included instead of the root.

FIG. 77 is a front view of a game board according to a modification of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 allows the game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. After that, the ball was provided with a croon route for guiding the ball to the croon 53 and a discharge route for discharging the ball to the outside of the right variable entry mechanism 52.
In contrast, in this modification, the game board 31 is equipped with a right variable ball entrance mechanism 52H, as shown in FIG. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it includes a croon route for guiding the ball to the croon 53 after entering the ball mechanism 52H, and an execution gate route for guiding the ball to the 4th round execution gate 524H.

FIG. 78 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
The right variable ball entry mechanism 52H has substantially the same configuration as the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. an introduction section 521 that allows the ball to enter the inside of the ball, a guide path 522 that guides the game ball guided by the introduction section 521 to the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H, and a destination of the game ball guided by the guide path 522. 4-round execution gate 524H and guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4) provided at the guide destination of guide passage 522. Further, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H includes an on-off valve 526 provided in the guide passage 522.

The introduction part 521 includes a blade member 521a provided on the game board 31 so as to close an entrance formed on the right side of the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52H, and a blade member 521a provided around an axis perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 31. It includes a pin 521b that rotatably supports the blade member 521a, and a blade member driving section 521c that drives the blade member 521a.

The blade member 521a rotates counterclockwise around the pin 521b, thereby switching between a closed state (dotted chain line in the figure) in which the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H is closed, and a clockwise rotation around the pin 521b. It has an open state (solid line in the figure) in which the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H is opened by moving the ball (see arrow in the figure). In the open state, the blade member 521a is inclined so as to descend toward the entrance side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H.
The blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the blade member 521a.

In this modification, the blade member 521a allows the game balls flowing down the game area to enter, based on the result of an internal lottery performed based on the game balls entering the operating ports 36, 37. Specifically, the blade member 521a is set to the open state if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery. Further, the blade member 521a is set to the closed state if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is not won in the internal lottery.
In addition, the introduction part 521 should just be configured so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52H, and the introduction part 521 can control the timing of opening and closing of the blade member 521a and the timing of opening and closing of the blade member 521a. The period can be set arbitrarily.

Therefore, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball travels along the blade member 521a and enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H using the slope of the blade member 521a. (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the blade member 521a is set to the closed state by the blade member drive unit 521c, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H (dotted chain line in the figure).

In this manner, in this modification, each of the operating ports 36, 37 functions as a lottery entry means that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter and performs an internal lottery when the game balls enter.
In addition, in this modification, the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52H can enter game balls flowing down the gaming area based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the lottery entry means. It functions as a variable ball entry means.
In this modification, the operating ports 36 and 37 are used as the lottery entry means, but the through gate 41 may be used as the lottery entry means, or other ball entry means may be used. good. In short, the lottery entry means only needs to be able to enter game balls flowing down the game area and execute an internal lottery when the game balls enter.

The guide passage 522 is formed with a width that prevents a plurality of game balls from passing through the passage at the same time. Further, the guide passage 522 branches into two in the middle, and has an upstream guide passage 522a located upstream of this branch, and two downstream guide passages 522b and 522c located downstream. .
Note that the guide passage 522 is formed to be transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the inside thereof can be viewed from the front side.

The upstream guide path 522a guides the game ball entered into the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H by the introduction part 521 from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H to the branch position of the guide path 522. This upstream guide passage 522a is inclined so as to descend from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H toward the branching position of the guide passage 522. Therefore, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a using the slope of the upstream guide passage 522a.

The downstream guide passage 522b is provided at a position close to the branch position of the guide passage 522. Further, the downstream guide passage 522b is formed along the vertically downward direction so as to cause the game ball to fall from the branch position of the guide passage 522. This downstream guide path 522b guides the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide path 522 along the upstream guide path 522a to the 4th round execution gate 524H. This 4th round execution gate 524H has the same function as each hole 533B, 533C of the clone 53, and when a ball enters the 4th round execution gate 524H, the pachinko machine 10 executes the 4th round game. Start execution.
The downstream guide passage 522c is provided at a position far from the branch position of the guide passage 522. Further, the downstream guide passage 522c is formed to extend the game ball from the branching position of the guide passage 522 to the guide rail 525. This downstream guide path 522c guides the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide path 522 along the upstream guide path 522a to the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4).

The switching part 523 supports a plate 523a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522c, and the plate 523a rotatably about an axis perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 31. It includes a pin 523b and a plate drive section 523c that drives the plate 523a.

The plate 523a can be rotated clockwise around the pin 523b to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure), and can be rotated counterclockwise around the pin 523b. By doing so, it has an open state (solid line in the figure) in which the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522c is closed and the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b is opened. In the closed state, the plate 523a is inclined so as to descend toward the downstream guide passage 522c.
The plate drive unit 523c sets the plate 523a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the plate 523a.

Therefore, when the plate 523a is set to the open state by the plate drive unit 523c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide path 522 is guided to the entrance of the downstream guide path 522b, and then is guided to the 4-round execution gate. 524H (solid line in the figure). Thereafter, the game ball enters the 4th round execution gate 524H (execution gate route).
On the other hand, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state by the plate drive unit 523c, the game ball that has reached the branching position of the guide path 522 passes along the plate 523a downstream using the slope of the plate 523a. After being guided to the entrance of the side guide passage 522c, it is guided to the guide rail 525 (double-dashed line in the figure). Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4) (crown route).

Here, the plate 523a is normally set in an open state (execution gate route) in which the game ball is not guided to the croon 53. Then, in the case where a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the transition is to the opening/closing execution mode, the plate 523a is set to a closed state (croon route) in which the game ball is guided to the croon 53.

The on-off valve 526 includes a valve body 526a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the upstream guide passage 522a, and an on-off valve drive section 526b that drives the valve body 526a.
By retreating toward the inside of the game board 31 and being buried in the game board 31, the valve main body 526a is in an open state in which a game ball that has entered the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52H passes through, and in an open state in which it faces toward the window panel 22. By moving forward and protruding from the game board 31, it has a closed state in which the game ball that enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H is not allowed to pass through.
The on-off valve drive unit 526b sets the valve body 526a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the valve body 526a.

Therefore, when the valve body 526a is set to the open state by the on-off valve drive unit 526b, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a.
On the other hand, when the valve body 526a is set to the closed state by the on-off valve drive unit 526b, the game ball comes to rest in the middle of the upstream guide passage 522a at the valve body 526a and enters a standby state ( solid line in the figure).

Here, when the upstream guide passage 522a stands still in the middle of the upstream guide passage 522a at the valve body 526a and enters a standby state (when one game ball is stationary at the valve body 526a), A discharge port 522a1 that discharges subsequent game balls that have entered the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52H, and a discharge passage that discharges the game balls that have entered the discharge port 522a1 into the gaming area via the opening 311 (see FIG. 77). 522a2.

The discharge port 522a1 is formed on the game board 31 at a distance of one game ball from the valve body 526a of the on-off valve 526 toward the blade member 521a side of the introduction portion 521. When the valve body 526a comes to rest in the middle of the upstream guide passage 522a and enters the standby state, subsequent game balls that enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H come into contact with the game balls that have entered the standby state. Then, the ball enters the outlet 522a1.
In addition, the upstream guide passage 522a may have an inclined surface slightly inclined toward the discharge port 522a1 in order to facilitate the entry of game balls into the discharge port 522a1.

As shown in FIG. 77, the discharge passage 522a2 merges with the discharge passage 536 of the croon 53 above the opening 311, and discharges the game balls into the gaming area through the opening 311.
In this way, the on-off valve 526 is configured so that two or more game balls do not come to rest at the valve body 526a.

As described above, in this modification, the on-off valve 526 has an open state in which the game ball that enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H passes through, and a closed state in which it does not pass through, and can be switched between the open state and the closed state. There is.
In addition, in this modification, the plate 523a has a first route (execution gate route) that guides the game ball that has passed through the on-off valve 526 to the downstream guide passage 522b (first flow passage), and a downstream guide passage. 522b, and functions as a route switching valve for switching between the first route and the second route. There is.

Here, the clone 53 selects a hole 533A (16 round execution gate) for starting the execution of 16 round games, and each hole 533B, 533C (4 round execution gate) for starting the execution of 4 round games. Therefore, it is possible to provide a higher value to the player compared to the 4-round execution gate 524H. In other words, the clone route can provide a higher value to the player than the execution gate route.
Therefore, in this modification, the execution gate route gives a predetermined value to the player by guiding the game ball to the downstream guide path 522b, and the croon route guides the game ball to the downstream guide path 522c. This gives players a higher value than the execution gate route.

Note that in this modification, the Cloon route gives the player a higher value than the Execution Gate route by increasing the number of times the round game is executed; however, for example, by increasing the payout of game balls, A higher value than the execution gate route may be given to the player by executing a special performance or the like.
In short, the second route may provide a higher value to the player than the first route by guiding the game ball to the second channel.

In addition, the croon 53 is provided with a rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball that has entered the right side variable ball entry mechanism 52H, and a rolling surface 531 that rolls the game ball that has entered the rolling surface 531. The execution gate route gives value to the player over a predetermined period of time by guiding the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522b, and the croon route gives value to the player. By guiding the game ball to the downstream guide path 522c, value is given to the player over a longer period of time than the execution gate route.

In addition, in this modification, the Kroon route gives value to the player over a longer period of time than the execution gate route by guiding the game ball to the rolling surface 531 of the Kroon 53. may give value to the player over a longer period of time than the execution gate route by guiding the game ball to different accessories, performing a special performance, etc.
In short, the second route can provide value to the player over a longer period of time than the first route by guiding the game ball to the second channel.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a timing chart of opening and closing of the vane member, the valve body, and the plate when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, FIG. 79(A) is a timing chart when the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and FIG. 79(B) is a timing chart when the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number. It is a timing chart when a combination of symbols having .
As described above, the blade member 521a is set to the open state if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery.

If the blade member 521a wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the internal lottery and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the blade member 521a executes opening/closing as shown in FIG. 79(A). After shifting to the mode, when 10 seconds have elapsed, the open state and the closed state are repeatedly set at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the blade member 521a opens and closes intermittently at a predetermined period.

In addition, if the blade member 521a wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the internal lottery and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, as shown in FIG. 79(B), After shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, when 15 seconds have elapsed, the open state and the closed state are repeatedly set at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the blade member 521a opens and closes intermittently at a predetermined period.

In this modification, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to a closed state for 1 sec and an open state for 0.5 sec. Further, the blade member 521a is installed in the open state a total of three times. Therefore, the blade member 521a opens and closes intermittently at a cycle of 1.5 seconds, and the period from the start of the first open state to the end of the third open state is 3.5 seconds.
In addition, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the angel's line in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "Aim for the croon with a right hit!" Suggests that the player bat right-handed.

Further, the valve body 526a is set to the open state for 0.5 seconds when 15 seconds and 25 seconds have passed after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the on-off valve 526 is set to the open state twice for 0.5 seconds after transitioning to the on-off execution mode.
Then, the plate 523a is set to the closed state for 10 seconds when 20 seconds have elapsed after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

If the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the MPU 62 switches to a state in which balls can enter the execution gate. In the state in which the ball can enter the execution gate, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to the open state and the closed state at a predetermined cycle when 10 seconds have passed after transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 79(A). Therefore, the game ball that enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H via the blade member 521a in the open state reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 when the valve body 526a is opened for the first time, and passes through the plate 523a in the open state. After being guided to the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b, the player is guided to the fourth round execution gate 524H. Thereafter, the game ball enters the 4th round execution gate 524H (execution gate route).

On the other hand, if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the MPU 62 switches to the state where the ball can be entered. In the croon entry possible state, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to the open state and the closed state at a predetermined cycle when 15 seconds have elapsed after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 79(B). Therefore, the game ball that enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H via the blade member 521a in the open state reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 when the valve body 526a is opened for the second time, and enters the plate 523a in the closed state. After being guided to the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522c, it is guided to the guide rail 525. Thereafter, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525 (crown route).

In addition, in this modification, when the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H via the blade member 521a in the open state in the execution gate ball entry possible state or the Croon ball entry possible state, the MPU 62 The game ends the game in the opening/closing execution mode and shifts to the normal state, but for example, the timing chart shown in FIG. 79(A) may be repeated, or other timing charts may be repeated. .

As described above, in this modification, the MPU 62 determines the state in which balls can enter the execution gate and the closing state based on the result (stop result) of the internal lottery performed based on the entry of game balls into each operating port 36, 37. It functions as a ball entry possible state switching means for switching the ball entry possible state.
In addition, in this modification, the MPU 62 switches between the execution gate ball entry possible state and the clown ball entry possible state based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into each operating port 36, 37. However, for example, based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the through gate 41, the execution gate entry possible state and the croon ball entry possible state may be switched. Based on the open state of the object 51, the state in which the ball can enter the execution gate and the state in which the ball can enter the Kroon may be switched, and the state in which the ball can enter the execution gate and the state in which the ball can enter the Kroon may be switched based on other information. good.
In short, the ball entry possible state switching means may switch between the execution gate ball entry possible state and the croon ball entry possible state.

In addition, in this modification, the MPU 62 sets the execution gate entry ball to allow the game ball flowing down the gaming area to pass through the on-off valve 526 when the plate 523a is switched to the execution gate route. A possible state (a first ball entry possible state) and a croon entry state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area is set to be able to enter the ball so as to pass through the on-off valve 526 when the plate 523a is switched to the croon route. The state in which the ball is allowed to enter (the second state in which the ball can be entered) is switched.
In addition, in this modification, the MPU 62 switches between the first ball entering possible state and the second ball entering possible state based on the timing chart shown in FIG. Any other timing chart may be used as long as it is possible to switch between the state and the second ball entry possible state.

According to this modification, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The MPU 62 switches between a state in which a ball can enter the execution gate and a state in which a ball can enter a Croon. A game ball flowing down the game area is set to be allowed to enter the game area, and the state where the ball can enter the game area is a game where the game ball flows down the game area so as to pass through the on-off valve 526 when the ball is switched to the crew route by the plate 523a. The ball is set to allow entry. Therefore, the player pays attention to the timing of switching the on-off valve 526 to the open state, so the pachinko machine 10 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(2) Since the MPU 62 switches between the execution gate ball entry possible state and the croon ball entry possible state based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the respective operating ports 36 and 37, the player Attention will be paid to the results of the internal lottery carried out based on the entry of game balls into the respective operation ports 36 and 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.
(3) Since the Kroon route gives the player a higher value than the execution gate route by guiding the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522c, the player can switch the MPU 62 to the state where the Kroon ball can enter. I expect that. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(4) The execution gate route gives value to the player over a predetermined amount of time by guiding the game ball to the downstream guide path 522b, and the croon route guides the game ball to the downstream guide path 522c. As a result, the player is given value over a longer period of time than the execution gate route, so when the player is switched to the execution gate route at the plate 523a, the player can comfortably proceed to the next game. When the game is switched to the Cloon route, the game can be thoroughly enjoyed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.
(5) Since the Kroon route guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 of the Kroon 53 by guiding the game ball to the downstream guide path 522c, it takes a longer time for the player to take the game ball than the downstream guide path 522b. A value can be added to the game ball, and the player pays attention to the fate of the game ball that enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of players to the game.

[Group of inventions extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments will be explained. Note that among the features of the present invention group, structures corresponding to each of the above embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above embodiments, and the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above embodiments. Modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1.
A firing means (a firing handle 27) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area that can enter the game ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. Based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, identification that is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a gaming state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the gaming state to a controlled state,
The game ball has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter the game area, and changes from the open state to the closed state based on the game ball entering the game area. an opening/closing ball entrance means (non-electric accessory 51) that transitions to;
Variable ball entry means (croon 53) that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the game ball based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. ,
The variable ball entry means is
A first ball entry section (holes 533B, 533C) that allows a game ball entered into the variable ball entry means to enter the ball entry means and prevents the opening/closing ball entry means from shifting from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball. )and,
a second ball entry portion (hole 533A) that allows a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter the ball and shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of the game ball; Equipped with
The gaming state transition means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, when the game ball enters any one of the opening/closing ball entry means, the first ball entry section, and the second ball entry section, the specific control state A gaming machine characterized by comprising specific control starting means (gaming state transition processing) for starting a game.

According to feature A1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is capable of allowing a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. The variable ball entry means includes a first ball entry part and a second ball entry part that start a game in a specific control state when a game ball enters the ball, so that the player can , After the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state by the gaming state transition means, the game in the specific control state is started by entering the game ball into the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section. Can be done. In addition, the second ball entry section shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so the player can control the next specific game state using the game state transition means. After transitioning to the state, a game in the specific control state can be started by allowing a game ball to enter the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the present invention group,
The game in the specific control state that starts when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section is controlled by the specific control state that starts when a game ball enters the first ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by providing a player with a higher value than a game in a controlled state.

According to feature A2 of the present invention group, a game in a specific control state that starts when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section is performed when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. Since the game gives the player a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the ball hits the ball, when the player starts the game in the specific control state by letting the game ball enter the variable ball entry means, , the ball is expected to enter the second ball entry section. In addition, when the opening/closing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry section, the player can change the gaming state to the next time using the gaming state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, by entering the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means, the game has a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is possible to start a game in a specific control state given to a player. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entering section, and controls the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering section. By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game balls enter the ball entry part, the game balls enter the first ball entry part. A gaming machine that provides a player with a higher value than a game in the specific control state that starts when a ball is entered.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group, the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section can start a game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the opening/closing ball entry means and The game ball enters the second ball entry section by starting a game in a specific control state that allows more game balls to be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the ball enters the second ball entry section, when starting the game in the specific control state, the player I have high expectations. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in feature A3 of the present invention group,
An open/closed entering ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters the game area. Equipped with a means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means includes:
After the opening/closing ball entry means is set to the open state and until it is set to the closed state again, one game (round game) in the specific control state is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball entry means is set to a predetermined number of times. By starting the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening/closing ball entering means to be more than the predetermined number of times, the game ball can be paid out of the predetermined number of game balls. A game machine characterized in that a game is started in the specific control state in which a larger number of game balls can be paid out.

According to feature A4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means sets the opening/closing number of times of the opening/closing ball entering means to a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters the first ball entering section, thereby allowing a predetermined number of games to be played. Start a game in a specific control state in which a ball can be put out, and set the number of opening and closing times of the opening/closing ball entering means to be greater than a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering section. By doing this, a game in a specific control state where more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls is started, so when the player starts a game in a specific control state, the player must We are looking forward to the ball entering the field. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A4 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
The variable ball entry means includes a croon (crown 53) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) that rolls the game ball that has entered the means,
A game machine characterized in that the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part are provided on the rolling surface and allow game balls rolling on the rolling surface to enter.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, so that the player can play a game in which the ball enters the variable ball entry means. The focus will be on where the ball goes. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A5 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing ball entry means is
a first receiving part (each plate-shaped body 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening/closing ball entry means;
a second receiving part (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball entry part;
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, the open state shifts to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part, the closed state shifts to the open state. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature A6 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entering means transitions from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball in the first receiving part, and receives the game ball in the second receiving part. Since the closed state is shifted to the open state, the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other motive power such as electric power.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on the first path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to feature A7 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue playing the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the first path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening/closing ball entry means via the first path. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means will transition from the open state to the closed state, so the player must change the gaming state to the specific control state by the time the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. You can play games with the expectation that you will

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on a third path (weak hitting route) different from the first path and the second path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue playing the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Furthermore, in the case where the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the third path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will not enter the opening/closing ball entry means. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player can play the game with peace of mind.

According to the feature group A of the present invention, it is possible to expand the choices of the player and improve the player's attention to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a game board is equipped with a firing means that fires game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and when the game balls enter an operating port (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes this is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.

However, after the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to the specific control state, it follows the same flow and starts the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the player's action is involved. There is a problem in that the series of steps from transitioning the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1.
A firing means (a firing handle 27) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area that can enter the game ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. Based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, identification that is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a gaming state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the gaming state to a controlled state,
The game ball has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter the game area, and changes from the open state to the closed state based on the game ball entering the game area. an opening/closing ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) that transitions to;
Variable ball entry means (clune 53A and first croon 55)
The variable ball entry means is
a ball entry section (holes 533A to 533C, 553A, 553B) for allowing the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means;
An opening/closing lottery means (a rotating body 537, a saucer 538, and a second croon 56) for executing a lottery regarding the opening/closing ball entrance means based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section,
The gaming state transition means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, specific control starting means (gaming state (transition processing).

According to feature B1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine allows the game ball to enter the game ball flowing down the gaming area based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. The variable ball entering means includes a ball entering section that starts a game in a specific control state when a game ball enters the ball, so the player can change the gaming state using the gaming state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, a game in the specific control state can be started by entering a game ball into the ball entry section. In addition, the variable ball entry means includes an opening/closing lottery means that performs a lottery regarding the opening/closing ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, so that, for example, the lottery executed by the opening/closing lottery means If the player wins and moves the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state, the player uses the gaming state transition means to shift the gaming state to the next specific control state, and then switches the opening/closing ball entry means to the next specific control state. By letting the game ball enter, a game in a specific control state can be started. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
A plurality of ball entry parts including a first ball entry part (holes 533B, 533C, 553B) and a second ball entry part (holes 533A, 553A),
The game in the specific control state that starts when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section is controlled by the specific control state that starts when a game ball enters the first ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by providing a player with a higher value than a game in a controlled state.

According to feature B2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section is performed when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. Since the game gives the player a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the ball hits the ball, when the player starts the game in the specific control state by letting the game ball enter the variable ball entry means, , the ball is expected to enter the second ball entry section. In addition, if the player wins the lottery executed by the opening/closing lottery means and moves the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state, the player can specify the next gaming state using the gaming state transition means. After transitioning to the control state, by letting the game ball enter the opening/closing ball entry means, the player receives a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is possible to start a game in a given specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B2 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entering section, and controls the opening/closing ball entering section and the second ball entering section. By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game balls enter the ball entry part, the game balls enter the first ball entry part. A gaming machine that provides a player with a higher value than a game in the specific control state that starts when a ball is entered.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section can start a game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the opening/closing ball entry means and The game ball enters the second ball entry section by starting a game in a specific control state that allows more game balls to be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the ball enters the second ball entry section, when starting the game in the specific control state, the player I have high expectations. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the present invention group,
An open/closed entering ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters the game area. Equipped with a means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means includes:
After the opening/closing ball entry means is set to the open state and until it is set to the closed state again, one game (round game) in the specific control state is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball entry means is set to a predetermined number of times. By starting the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening/closing ball entering means to be more than the predetermined number of times, the game ball can be paid out of the predetermined number of game balls. A game machine characterized in that a game is started in the specific control state in which a larger number of game balls can be paid out.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means sets a predetermined number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball entering means to a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the first ball entering section. Start a game in a specific control state in which a ball can be put out, and set the number of opening and closing times of the opening/closing ball entering means to be greater than a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering section. By doing this, a game in a specific control state where more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls is started, so when the player starts a game in a specific control state, the player must We are looking forward to the ball entering the field. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features B2 to B4 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
The variable ball entry means includes a croon (crown 53A and first croon 55) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) that rolls the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means,
A game machine characterized in that the plurality of ball entry parts are provided on the rolling surface and allow game balls rolling on the rolling surface to enter.

According to feature B5 of the present invention group, since the plurality of ball entry parts are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the player can pay attention to the destination of the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in feature B5 of the present invention group,
The rolling surface is
The plurality of ball entry portions are formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface and are equally spaced from each other,
The opening/closing lottery means is
A rotating body (rotating body 537) that rotates about an axis passing through the center of the rolling surface and allows game balls that have entered the plurality of ball entry sections to enter the ball,
The rotating body is
A plurality of rotating body passages (rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3) are formed at positions corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry parts and guide game balls that have entered the plurality of ball entry parts,
The plurality of rotating body passages are
a first rotating body passage (rotating body passage 537C2, 537C3) that does not cause the opening/closing ball entering means to shift from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball;
A game machine characterized by comprising a second rotating body passage (rotating body passage 537C1) that shifts the opening/closing ball entering means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball.

According to feature B6 of the present invention group, the opening/closing lottery means includes a rotating body that rotates about an axis passing through the center of the rolling surface and that receives game balls that have entered the plurality of ball entry sections. The rotating body includes a first rotating body passage that does not cause the opening/closing ball entering means to change from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball, and a first rotating body passage that does not cause the opening/closing ball entry means to change from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball. and a second rotating body passage. According to this, the opening/closing lottery means independently moves the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state without being influenced by the clone having a plurality of ball entering parts that starts a game in a specific control state when a game ball enters the ball. It is possible to make a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the open state. In addition, when the opening/closing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by allowing the game balls that have entered the plurality of ball entry sections to enter the second rotating body passage of the rotating body, the game After the game state is transferred to the next specific control state using the game state transition means, the player enters the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means, thereby causing the game ball to enter the first ball entry section. It is possible to start a game in a specific control state that provides a higher value to the player than the game in the specific control state to be started. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in feature B5 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing lottery means is
A lottery croon (second croon 56) having a lottery rolling surface (rolling surface 561) for rolling the game balls that have entered the first ball entry part and the second ball entrance part;
The said lottery clone is
A plurality of lottery ball entry parts (holes 563A to 563C) are provided on the lottery rolling surface and into which game balls rolling on the lottery rolling surface enter,
The plurality of lottery entry sections are:
a first lottery ball entry section (each hole 563B, 563C) that does not cause the opening/closing ball entry means to shift from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball;
A game machine characterized by comprising a second lottery ball entry part (hole 563A) that shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball.

According to feature B7 of the present invention group, the opening/closing lottery means includes a first lottery ball entering section that does not shift the opening/closing ball entering means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball; A lottery croon is provided with a second lottery ball entry section that shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from a closed state to an open state based on the ball. According to this, the opening/closing lottery means independently operates without being influenced by the crew including the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section, which start the game in a specific control state when the game ball enters. A lottery can be performed to determine whether or not the opening/closing ball entering means should be shifted from the closed state to the open state. Further, by allowing the game balls that have entered the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section to enter the second lottery ball entry section, the opening/closing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. In this case, the player transfers the gaming state to the next specific control state using the gaming state transition means, and then enters the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means to enter the first ball entry section. It is possible to start a game in a specific control state that gives the player a higher value than a game in a specific control state that is started when a game ball enters the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B7 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing ball entry means is
a first receiving part (each plate-shaped body 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening/closing ball entry means;
a second receiving part (each lower blade member 515) for receiving the game ball that has entered the second ball entering part;
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, the open state shifts to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part, the closed state shifts to the open state. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature B8 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball in the first receiving part, and receives the game ball in the second receiving part. Since the closed state is shifted to the open state, the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other motive power such as electric power.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on the first path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to feature B9 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue playing the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the first path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening/closing ball entry means via the first path. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means will transition from the open state to the closed state, so the player must change the gaming state to the specific control state by the time the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. You can play games with the expectation that you will

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on a third path (weak hitting route) different from the first path and the second path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine switches from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to feature B10 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue playing the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Furthermore, in the case where the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the third path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will not enter the opening/closing ball entry means. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player can play the game with peace of mind.

According to the feature group B of the present invention, it is possible to expand the choices of the player and improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a game board is equipped with a firing means that fires game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and when the game balls enter an operating port (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes this is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.

However, after the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to the specific control state, it follows the same flow and starts the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the player's action is involved. There is a problem in that the series of steps from transitioning the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1.
A firing means (a firing handle 27) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area that can enter the game ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. Based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, identification that is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a gaming state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the gaming state to a controlled state,
The game ball has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter the game area, and changes from the open state to the closed state based on the game ball entering the game area. an opening/closing ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) that transitions to;
Based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the game ball flowing down the gaming area is allowed to enter, and the opening/closing entry ball is set based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A variable entry means (Clune 53C) for shifting the means from a closed state to an open state,
The gaming state transition means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, specific control starting means (gaming state transition processing ) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is capable of allowing a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. The variable ball entry means starts a game in a specific control state when a game ball enters the ball, so that the player can use the game state transition means to shift the gaming state to the specific control state. By entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means, a game in a specific control state can be started. In addition, when the opening/closing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering a game ball into the variable ball entry means, the player can change the gaming state to the next time using the gaming state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
The variable ball entry means includes a first ball entry part (holes 533B, 533C) and a second ball entry part (hole 533A) into which the game ball enters,
The game state transition means starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section,
The game in the specific control state that starts when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section is controlled by the specific control state that starts when a game ball enters the first ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by providing a player with a higher value than a game in a controlled state.

According to feature C2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section is performed when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. Since the game gives the player a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the ball hits the ball, when the player starts the game in the specific control state by letting the game ball enter the variable ball entry means, , the ball is expected to enter the second ball entry section. In addition, when the opening/closing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering a game ball into the variable ball entry means, the player can change the gaming state to the next time using the gaming state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, by entering the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means, the player can enjoy a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is possible to start a game with a specific control state given to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in feature C2 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entering section, and controls the opening/closing ball entering section and the second ball entering section. By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game balls enter the ball entry part, the game balls enter the first ball entry part. A gaming machine that provides a player with a higher value than a game in the specific control state that starts when a ball is entered.

According to feature C3 of the present invention group, the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section can start a game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the opening/closing ball entry means and The game ball enters the second ball entry section by starting a game in a specific control state that allows more game balls to be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the ball enters the second ball entry section, when starting the game in the specific control state, the player I have high expectations. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in feature C3 of the present invention group,
An open/closed entering ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters the game area. Equipped with a means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means includes:
After the opening/closing ball entry means is set to the open state and until it is set to the closed state again, one game (round game) in the specific control state is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball entry means is set to a predetermined number of times. By starting the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening/closing ball entering means to be more than the predetermined number of times, the game ball can be paid out of the predetermined number of game balls. A game machine characterized in that a game is started in the specific control state in which a larger number of game balls can be paid out.

According to feature C4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means sets a predetermined number of times of opening and closing of the opening/closing ball entering means to a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the first ball entering section. Start a game in a specific control state in which a ball can be put out, and set the number of opening and closing times of the opening/closing ball entering means to be greater than a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering section. By doing this, a game in a specific control state where more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls is started, so when the player starts a game in a specific control state, the player must We are looking forward to the ball entering the field. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features C2 to C4 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
The variable ball entry means includes a croon (crown 53C) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the ball,
A game machine characterized in that the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part are provided on the rolling surface and allow game balls rolling on the rolling surface to enter.

According to feature C5 of the present invention group, since the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the player can play a game in which the ball enters the variable ball entry means. The focus will be on where the ball goes. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C5 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing ball entering means is
a first receiving part (each plate-shaped body 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening/closing ball entry means;
a second receiving part (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball entry part;
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, the open state shifts to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part, the closed state shifts to the open state. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature C6 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entering means transitions from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball in the first receiving part, and receives the game ball in the second receiving part. Since the closed state is shifted to the open state, the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other motive power such as electric power.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on the first path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine switches from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to feature C7 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue playing the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the first path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening/closing ball entry means via the first path. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means will transition from the open state to the closed state, so the player must change the gaming state to the specific control state by the time the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. You can play games with the expectation that you will

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on a third path (weak hitting route) different from the first path and the second path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine switches from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to feature C8 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue playing the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Furthermore, in the case where the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the third path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will not enter the opening/closing ball entry means. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player can play the game with peace of mind.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, it is possible to expand the choices of the player and improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a game board is equipped with a firing means that fires game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and when the game balls enter an operating port (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes this is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.

However, after the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to the specific control state, it follows the same flow and starts the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the player's action is involved. There is a problem in that the series of steps from transitioning the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1.
A firing means (a firing handle 27) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area that can enter the game ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. Based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, identification that is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a gaming state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the gaming state to a controlled state,
The game ball has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter the game area, and changes from the open state to the closed state based on the game ball entering the game area. an opening/closing ball entrance means (non-electric accessory 57) that transitions to;
Based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the game ball flowing down the gaming area is allowed to enter, and the opening/closing entry ball is set based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A variable entry means (Clune 53D) for shifting the means from a closed state to an open state,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on a third path (weak hitting route) different from the first path and the second path,
The gaming state transition means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, specific control starting means (gaming state transition processing ) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is capable of allowing a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. The variable ball entry means starts a game in a specific control state when a game ball enters the ball, so that the player can use the game state transition means to shift the gaming state to the specific control state. By entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means, a game in a specific control state can be started. In addition, when the opening/closing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering a game ball into the variable ball entry means, the player can change the gaming state to the next time using the gaming state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game. In addition, since the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the third path, the player can open/close the ball entering means by launching the game ball in a different route than when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. A game ball can be entered into the ball means. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intention and allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to feature D2 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue to play the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second game state to the first game state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. In addition, since the opening/closing ball entry means is disposed on the third path, the player can wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the player moves the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will not enter the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the opening/closing ball entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
The variable ball entry means includes a first ball entry part (holes 533B, 533C) and a second ball entry part (hole 533A) into which the game ball enters,
The specific control starting means starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section,
The game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section is controlled by the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by providing a player with a higher value than a game in a controlled state.

According to feature D3 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section is performed when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. Since the game gives the player a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the ball hits the ball, when the player starts the game in the specific control state by letting the game ball enter the variable ball entry means, , the ball is expected to enter the second ball entry section. In addition, when the opening/closing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering a game ball into the variable ball entry means, the player can change the gaming state to the next time using the gaming state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, by entering the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means, the player can enjoy a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is possible to start a game with a specific control state given to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in feature D3 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entering section, and controls the opening/closing ball entering section and the second ball entering section. By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game balls enter the ball entry part, the game balls enter the first ball entry part. A gaming machine that provides a player with a higher value than a game in the specific control state that starts when a ball is entered.

According to feature D4 of the present invention group, the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section can start a game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the opening/closing ball entry means and The game ball enters the second ball entry section by starting a game in a specific control state that allows more game balls to be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the ball enters the second ball entry section, when starting the game in the specific control state, the player I have high expectations. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in feature D4 of the present invention group,
An open/closed entering ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters the game area. Equipped with a means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means includes:
After the opening/closing ball entry means is set to the open state and until it is set to the closed state again, one game (round game) in the specific control state is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball entry means is set to a predetermined number of times. By starting the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening/closing ball entering means to be more than the predetermined number of times, the game ball can be paid out of the predetermined number of game balls. A game machine characterized in that a game is started in the specific control state in which a larger number of game balls can be paid out.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means sets a predetermined number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the first ball entry section. Start a game in a specific control state in which a ball can be put out, and set the number of opening and closing times of the opening/closing ball entering means to be greater than a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering section. By doing this, a game in a specific control state where more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls is started, so when the player starts a game in a specific control state, the player must We are looking forward to the ball entering the field. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D3 to D5 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
The variable ball entry means includes a croon (crown 53D) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the ball,
A game machine characterized in that the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part are provided on the rolling surface and allow game balls rolling on the rolling surface to enter.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, so that the player can play a game in which the ball enters the variable ball entry means. The focus will be on where the ball goes. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D8 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing ball entering means is
a first receiving part (each blade member 571) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening/closing ball entry means;
a second receiving part (second arm part 576C) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball entry part;
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, the open state shifts to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part, the closed state shifts to the open state. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature D7 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball in the first receiving part, and receives the game ball in the second receiving part. Since the closed state is shifted to the open state, the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other motive power such as electric power.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, it is possible to expand the choices of the player and improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a game board is equipped with a firing means that fires game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and when the game balls enter an operating port (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes this is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.

However, after the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to the specific control state, it follows the same flow and starts the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the player's action is involved. There is a problem in that the series of steps from transitioning the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1.
A firing means (a firing handle 27) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area that can enter the game ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. Based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, identification that is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a gaming state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the gaming state to a controlled state,
The game ball has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter the game area, and changes from the open state to the closed state based on the game ball entering the game area. an opening/closing ball entrance means (non-electric accessory 51) that transitions to;
Variable ball entry means (Clune 53E) that allows game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter the game ball based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the starting ball entry means. ,
The variable ball entry means is
A first ball entry section (holes 533B, 533C) that allows a game ball entered into the variable ball entry means to enter the ball entry means and prevents the opening/closing ball entry means from shifting from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball. )and,
a second ball entry portion (hole 533A) that allows a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter the ball and shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of the game ball; Equipped with
The gaming state transition means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, when the game ball enters any one of the opening/closing ball entry means, the first ball entry section, and the second ball entry section, the specific control state Equipped with a specific control start means (game state transition processing) for starting the game,
The game in the specific control state is
A first specific game (four round games),
a second specific game (16 round games) that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game;
The specific control starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature E1 of the present invention group, the game machine can enter the game ball flowing down the gaming area based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. The variable ball entry means includes a first ball entry part and a second ball entry part that start a game in a specific control state when a game ball enters the ball, so that the player can , After the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state by the gaming state transition means, the game in the specific control state is started by entering the game ball into the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section. I can do it. In addition, the second ball entry section shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so the player can control the next specific game state using the game state transition means. After transitioning to the state, a game in the specific control state can be started by allowing a game ball to enter the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Further, the game in the specific control state includes a first specific game and a second specific game that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game, and the specific control starting means Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball enters the ball section and the second ball entry section, the player enters the game ball into the variable ball entry means. By doing so, when starting a game in a specific control state, the player expects the start of a second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that the game in the specific control state that is started when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means is the second specific game.

According to feature E2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means is the second specific game, so the game ball enters the second ball entry section. When the player moves the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entering, the player must use the gaming state transition means to shift the gaming state to the next specific control state, and then open/close the ball entry means. By introducing a game ball into the means, it is possible to start a second specific game that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game. In addition, when starting a game in a specific control state by letting a game ball enter the variable ball entry means, the player expects the game ball to enter the second ball entry section, and The player is looking forward to the start of the second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 or feature E2 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means transfers game balls to the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section by executing a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. A gaming machine characterized in that the first specific game and the second specific game are set to be started when a ball is entered.

According to feature E3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby changing the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section. Since the first specific game and the second specific game are set to be started when the game ball enters the game ball, the player pays attention to the result of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. It turns out. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E3 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the first specific game that can pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts the second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature E4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts a first specific game that can pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and a second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the specific game is started, the player expects the start of the second specific game when starting the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in feature E4 of the present invention group,
An open/closed entering ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters the game area. Equipped with a means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means includes:
After the opening/closing ball entry means is set to the open state and until it is set to the closed state again, one game (round game) in the specific control state is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball entry means is set to a predetermined number of times. By starting the first specific game in which the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and by setting the number of opening and closing of the opening/closing ball entering means to be more than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of game balls can be played. A gaming machine characterized by starting the second specific game in which more game balls than balls can be paid out.

According to characteristic E5 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts a first specific game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined number of times, and By setting the number of openings and closings of the ball entry means to a number greater than a predetermined number of times, the second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls is started, so the player can control the specific control. When starting a state game, the player expects the start of the second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E5 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
The variable ball entry means includes a croon (crown 53E) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the ball,
A game machine characterized in that the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part are provided on the rolling surface and allow game balls rolling on the rolling surface to enter.

According to feature E6 of the present invention group, since the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the player can play a game in which the ball enters the variable ball entry means. The focus will be on where the ball goes. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E6 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing ball entry means is
a first receiving part (each plate-shaped body 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening/closing ball entry means;
a second receiving part (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball entry part;
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, the open state shifts to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part, the closed state shifts to the open state. A gaming machine that does.

According to characteristic E7 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entering means transitions from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball in the first receiving part, and receives the game ball in the second receiving part. Since the closed state is shifted to the open state, the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other motive power such as electric power.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E7 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on the first path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine switches from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to feature E8 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue playing the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the first path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening/closing ball entry means via the first path. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means will transition from the open state to the closed state, so the player must change the gaming state to the specific control state by the time the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. You can play games with the expectation that you will

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E7 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on a third path (weak hitting route) different from the first path and the second path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to feature E9 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue playing the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Furthermore, in the case where the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the third path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will not enter the opening/closing ball entry means. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player can play the game with peace of mind.

According to the characteristic group E of the present invention, it is possible to expand the choices of the player and improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a game board is equipped with a firing means that fires game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and when the game balls enter an operating port (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes this is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.

However, after the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to the specific control state, it follows the same flow and starts the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the player's action is involved. There is a problem in that the series of steps from transitioning the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Characteristics Group F>
Feature F1.
A firing means (a firing handle 27) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area that can enter the game ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. Based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, identification that is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a gaming state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the gaming state to a controlled state,
The game ball has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter the game area, and changes from the open state to the closed state based on the game ball entering the game area. an opening/closing ball entrance means (non-electric accessory 51) that transitions to;
Variable ball entry means (clune 53A and first croon 55)
The variable ball entry means is
a ball entry section (holes 533A to 533C, 553A, 553B) for allowing the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means;
An opening/closing lottery means (a rotating body 537, a saucer 538, and a second croon 56) for executing a lottery regarding the opening/closing ball entrance means based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section,
The gaming state transition means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, specific control starting means (gaming state migration processing),
The game in the specific control state is
A first specific game (four round games),
a second specific game (16 round games) that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game;
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific control starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when a game ball enters the ball entry section.

According to feature F1 of the present invention group, the game machine is capable of allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. The variable ball entering means includes a ball entering section that starts a game in a specific control state when a game ball enters the ball, so the player can change the gaming state using the gaming state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, a game in the specific control state can be started by entering a game ball into the ball entry section. In addition, the variable ball entry means includes an opening/closing lottery means that performs a lottery regarding the opening/closing ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, so that, for example, the lottery executed by the opening/closing lottery means If the player wins and moves the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state, the player uses the gaming state transition means to shift the gaming state to the next specific control state, and then switches the opening/closing ball entry means to the next specific control state. By letting the game ball enter, a game in a specific control state can be started. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Further, the game in the specific control state includes a first specific game and a second specific game that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game, and the specific control starting means is configured to control the ball entering section. Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball enters the ball, the player can play the game in the specific control state by letting the game ball enter the variable ball entry means. If the player wants to start the second specific game, he or she is expected to start the second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature F2.
A firing means (a firing handle 27) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area that can enter the game ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. Based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, identification that is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a gaming state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the gaming state to a controlled state,
The game ball has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter the game area, and changes from the open state to the closed state based on the game ball entering the game area. an opening/closing ball entrance means (non-electric accessory 51) that transitions to;
Based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the game ball flowing down the gaming area is allowed to enter, and the opening/closing entry ball is set based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A variable entry means (Clune 53C) for shifting the means from a closed state to an open state,
The gaming state transition means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, specific control starting means (gaming state transition processing ),
The game in the specific control state is
A first specific game (four round games),
a second specific game (16 round games) that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game;
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific control starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when a game ball enters the variable ball entering device.

According to feature F2 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is capable of allowing a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. The variable ball entry means starts a game in a specific control state when a game ball enters the ball, so that the player can use the game state transition means to shift the gaming state to the specific control state. By entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means, a game in a specific control state can be started. In addition, when the opening/closing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering a game ball into the variable ball entry means, the player can change the gaming state to the next time using the gaming state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Further, the game in the specific control state includes a first specific game and a second specific game that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game, and the specific control starting means is a variable ball entry means. Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the player can play the game in the specific control state by letting the game ball enter the variable ball entry means. When starting the second specific game, the player expects the second specific game to start. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 or feature F2 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that the game in the specific control state that is started when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means is the second specific game.

According to feature F3 of the present invention group, since the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means is the second specific game, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. When the player moves the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the ball, the player must use the gaming state transition means to shift the gaming state to the next specific control state, and then switch the opening/closing ball entering means. By letting the game ball enter, it is possible to start a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game. Moreover, when the player starts a game in a specific control state by letting a game ball enter the variable ball entry means, he or she expects the start of a second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F3 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, so that the first specific game starts when a game ball enters the variable entry ball means. A gaming machine characterized by setting a game and the second specific game.

According to feature F4 of the present invention group, the game state transition means starts when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means by executing a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Since the first specific game and the second specific game to be played are set, the player will pay attention to the result of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F4 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the first specific game that can pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts the second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature F5 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts a first specific game that can pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and a second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the specific game is started, the player expects the start of the second specific game when starting the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in feature F5 of the present invention group,
An open/closed entering ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters the game area. Equipped with a means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means includes:
After the opening/closing ball entry means is set to the open state and until it is set to the closed state again, one game (round game) in the specific control state is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball entry means is set to a predetermined number of times. By starting the first specific game in which the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and by setting the number of opening and closing of the opening/closing ball entering means to be more than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of game balls can be played. A gaming machine characterized by starting the second specific game in which more game balls than balls can be paid out.

According to feature F6 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts a first specific game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined number of times, and By setting the number of openings and closings of the ball entry means to a number greater than a predetermined number of times, the second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls is started, so the player can control the specific control. When starting a state game, the player expects the start of the second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F6 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
a plurality of ball entry portions (holes 533A to 533C, 553A, 553B) into which game balls enter the variable ball entry means;
The variable ball entry means includes a croon (crown 53A, croon 53C, and first croon 55) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the ball,
A game machine characterized in that the plurality of ball entry parts are provided on the rolling surface and allow game balls rolling on the rolling surface to enter.

According to feature F7 of the present invention group, since the plurality of ball entry portions are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the player does not have to pay attention to the destination of the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F7 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing ball entering means is
a first receiving part (each plate-shaped body 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening/closing ball entry means;
a second receiving part (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball entry part;
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, the open state shifts to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part, the closed state shifts to the open state. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature F8 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball in the first receiving part, and receives the game ball in the second receiving part. Since the closed state is shifted to the open state, the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other motive power such as electric power.

Feature F9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to E8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on the first path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to the feature F9 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue playing the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the first path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening/closing ball entry means via the first path. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means will transition from the open state to the closed state, so the player must change the gaming state to the specific control state by the time the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. You can play games with the expectation that you will

Feature F10.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on a third path (weak hitting route) different from the first path and the second path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine switches from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to the feature F10 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue playing the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Furthermore, in the case where the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the third path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will not enter the opening/closing ball entry means. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player can play the game with peace of mind.

According to the feature group F of the present invention, it is possible to expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a game board is equipped with a firing means that fires game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and when the game balls enter an operating port (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes this is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.

However, after the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to the specific control state, it follows the same flow and starts the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the player's action is involved. There is a problem in that the series of steps from transitioning the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1.
A firing means (a firing handle 27) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area that can enter the game ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. Based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, identification that is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a gaming state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the gaming state to a controlled state,
A variable ball entry means (clune 53E) is provided that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the game ball based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means,
The variable ball entry means is
a specific ball entry unit (round game execution gate) that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter the ball and controls the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball;
The variable ball entry means is characterized by comprising a non-specific ball entry section (replay gate) that allows a game ball entered into the variable ball entry means and does not control the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball. Game machine.

According to feature G1 of the present invention group, the game machine is capable of allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. The variable ball entry means includes a specific ball entry section that controls the game in a specific control state when the game ball enters the ball, so the player can change the game state using the game state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be controlled by letting the game ball enter the specific ball entry section. Further, since the non-specific ball entry section does not control the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball, the player can cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means again. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the non-specific ball entering section executes payout of game balls based on the ball entering the game ball.

According to feature G2 of the present invention group, since the non-specific ball entry unit executes the payout of game balls based on the entry of game balls, the player can change the gaming state to the specific control state using the gaming state transition means. After the transition, by letting game balls enter the non-specific ball entering section, it is possible to increase the number of game balls without controlling the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 or feature G2 of the present invention group,
The game ball has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter the game area, and changes from the open state to the closed state based on the game ball entering the game area. Equipped with an opening/closing ball entrance means (non-electric accessory 51) that transitions to
The gaming state transition means is
After transitioning the gaming state to the specific control state, a specific control starting means (gaming state transition processing) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball enters the specific ball entering section,
The variable ball entry means is
the non-specific ball entry section that allows a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter the ball and does not cause the opening/closing ball entry means to shift from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball;
It is characterized by comprising the specific ball entry section that allows a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means to enter the ball, and shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature G3 of the present invention group, the specific ball entry section shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so the player can play the game with the game state transition means. After shifting the state to the next specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 or feature G2 of the present invention group,
The game ball has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter the game area, and changes from the open state to the closed state based on the game ball entering the game area. Equipped with an opening/closing ball entering means (non-electric accessory 51) that transitions to
The gaming state transition means is
After transitioning the gaming state to the specific control state, a specific control starting means (gaming state transition processing) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball enters the specific ball entering section,
The variable ball entry means is
the specific ball entry section that allows a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means to enter the ball and does not cause the opening/closing ball entry means to shift from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball;
and the non-specific ball entry section that allows a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter the ball entry means and shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of the game ball. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature G4 of the present invention group, the non-specific ball entry section moves the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so the player can then move the opening/closing ball entry means to the open state. By letting the game ball enter the ball, it is possible to start a game in a specific control state without letting the game ball enter the specific ball entry section. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 or feature G4 of the present invention group,
The game in the specific control state is
A first specific game (four round games),
a second specific game (16 round games) that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game;
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific control starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when a game ball enters the specific ball entering section.

According to characteristic G5 of the present invention group, a game in a specific control state includes a first specific game and a second specific game that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game, and Since the starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters the specific ball entry section, the player causes the game ball to enter the specific ball entry section. Therefore, when starting a game in a specific control state, the player expects the start of a second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in feature G5 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that the game in the specific control state that is started when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means is the second specific game.

According to feature G6 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that starts when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means is the second specific game, so the opening/closing ball entering means is changed from the closed state to the open state. In the case where the player enters the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means, the player starts a second specific game that provides the player with a higher value than the first specific game. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in feature G5 or feature G6 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, so that the first specific game starts when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by setting a game and the second specific game.

According to feature G7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means starts when the game ball enters the specific ball entry section by executing a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Since the first specific game and the second specific game to be played are set, the player will pay attention to the result of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature G8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G5 to G7 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the first specific game that can pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts the second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. A gaming machine featuring:

According to characteristic G8 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts a first specific game that can pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and a second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the specific game is started, the player expects the start of the second specific game when starting the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature G9.
In the gaming machine described in feature G8 of the present invention group,
An open/closed entering ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters the game area. Equipped with a means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means includes:
After the opening/closing ball entry means is set to the open state and until it is set to the closed state again, one game (round game) in the specific control state is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball entry means is set to a predetermined number of times. By starting the first specific game in which the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and by setting the number of opening and closing of the opening/closing ball entering means to be more than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of game balls can be played. A gaming machine characterized by starting the second specific game in which more game balls than balls can be paid out.

According to feature G9 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts a first specific game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined number of times, and By setting the number of openings and closings of the ball entry means to a number greater than a predetermined number of times, the second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls is started, so the player can control the specific control. When starting a state game, the player expects the start of the second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature G10.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G9 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing ball entry means is
a first receiving part (each plate-shaped body 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening/closing ball entry means;
a second receiving part (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball entry part;
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, the open state shifts to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part, the closed state shifts to the open state. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature G10 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entering means transitions from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball in the first receiving part, and receives the game ball in the second receiving part. Since the closed state is shifted to the open state, the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other motive power such as electric power.

Feature G11.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G10 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on the first path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to feature G11 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue to play the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the first path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening/closing ball entry means via the first path. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means will transition from the open state to the closed state, so the player must change the gaming state to the specific control state by the time the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. You can play games with the expectation that you will

Feature G12.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G10 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on a third path (weak hitting route) different from the first path and the second path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine switches from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to feature G12 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue playing the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Furthermore, in the case where the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the third path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will not enter the opening/closing ball entry means. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Feature G13.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G12 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
The variable ball entry means includes a croon (crown 53E) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the ball,
A game machine characterized in that the specific ball entering section and the non-specific ball entering section are provided on the rolling surface and allow game balls rolling on the rolling surface to enter.

According to feature G13 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry section and the non-specific ball entry section are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the player can determine the whereabouts of the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means. The focus will be on Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

According to the characteristic group G of the present invention, it is possible to expand the choices of the player and improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a game board is equipped with a firing means that fires game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and when the game balls enter an operating port (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes this is known. For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.

However, after the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to the specific control state, it follows the same flow and starts the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the player's action is involved. There is a problem in that the series of steps from transitioning the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1.
A firing means (a firing handle 27) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area that can enter the game ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. Based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, identification that is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a gaming state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the gaming state to a controlled state,
A variable ball entry means (clune 53E) is provided that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the game ball based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means,
The variable ball entry means is
a specific ball entry unit (round game execution gate) that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter the ball and controls the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball;
The game ball that enters the variable ball entry means is allowed to enter, and the game is controlled in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball, different from the control of the game in the specific control state by the specific ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a non-specific ball entry section (replay gate) that controls.

According to feature H1 of the present invention group, the game machine is capable of allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. Since the variable ball entry means includes a specific ball entry section that executes a game in a specific control state when a game ball enters, the player can change the game state using the game state transition means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be controlled by letting the game ball enter the specific ball entry section. In addition, since the non-specific ball entering section controls the game in the specific control state based on the entering of the game ball, unlike the control of the game in the specific control state by the specific ball entering section, the player can After the gaming state is transferred to the specific control state by the transition means, by letting the game ball enter the non-specific ball entry section, specific control is performed so that the game control in the specific control state is different from the control of the game by the specific ball entry section. You can control the game of the state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature H2.
In the gaming machine described in feature H1 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means is
After transitioning the gaming state to the specific control state, a specific control starting means (gaming state transition processing) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball enters the specific ball entering section,
The game in the specific control state is
A first specific game (four round games),
a second specific game (16 round games) that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game;
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific control starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when a game ball enters the specific ball entering section.

According to feature H2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state includes a first specific game and a second specific game that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game, and Since the starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters the specific ball entry section, the player causes the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, when starting a game in a specific control state, the player expects the start of a second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature H3.
In the gaming machine described in feature H2 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, so that the first specific game starts when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. By setting a game and the second specific game, and executing a re-lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game when a game ball enters the non-specific ball entry section, A gaming machine characterized in that the first specific game and the second specific game that are started when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section are reset.

According to feature H3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means starts when the game ball enters the specific ball entry section by executing a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Since the first specific game and the second specific game to be played are set, the player will pay attention to the result of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Further, the game state transition means executes a re-lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game when the game ball enters the non-specified ball entry section, thereby changing the game to the specific ball entry section. Since the first specific game and the second specific game that are started when the ball enters the ball are reset, the player can start the first specific game and the second specific game by entering the game ball into the non-specific ball entering section. The result of the lottery for selecting the specific game No. 2 can be changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature H4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H3 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the first specific game that can pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts the second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature H4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts a first specific game that can pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and a second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the specific game is started, the player expects the start of the second specific game when starting the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature H5.
In the gaming machine described in feature H4 of the present invention group,
An open/closed entering ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters the game area. Equipped with a means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control starting means includes:
After the opening/closing ball entry means is set to the open state and until it is set to the closed state again, one game (round game) in the specific control state is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball entry means is set to a predetermined number of times. By starting the first specific game in which the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and by setting the number of opening and closing of the opening/closing ball entering means to be more than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of game balls can be played. A gaming machine characterized by starting the second specific game in which more game balls than balls can be paid out.

According to feature H5 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts a first specific game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening/closing ball entering means to a predetermined number of times, and By setting the number of openings and closings of the ball entry means to a number greater than a predetermined number of times, the second specific game that can pay out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls is started, so the player can control the specific control. When starting a state game, the player expects the start of the second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature H6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H5 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the non-specific ball entering section executes payout of game balls based on the ball entering the game ball.

According to feature H6 of the present invention group, since the non-specific ball entry unit executes payout of game balls based on the entry of game balls, the player can change the gaming state to the specific control state using the gaming state transition means. After the transition, by letting the game balls enter the non-specific ball entry section, it is possible to increase the number of game balls without starting a game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature H7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H6 of the present invention group,
The game ball has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter the game area, and changes from the open state to the closed state based on the game ball entering the game area. Equipped with an opening/closing ball entrance means (non-electric accessory 51) that transitions to
The variable ball entry means is
the non-specific ball entry section that allows a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means to enter the ball and does not cause the opening/closing ball entry means to shift from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball;
It is characterized by comprising the specific ball entry section that allows a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means to enter the ball, and shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature H7 of the present invention group, the specific ball entry section shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so the player can play the game with the game state transition means. After shifting the state to the next specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature H8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H6 of the present invention group,
The game ball has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter the game area, and changes from the open state to the closed state based on the game ball entering the game area. Equipped with an opening/closing ball entrance means (non-electric accessory 51) that transitions to
The variable ball entry means is
the specific ball entry section that allows a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means to enter the ball and does not cause the opening/closing ball entry means to shift from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball;
and the non-specific ball entry section that allows a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter the ball entry means and shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of the game ball. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature H8 of the present invention group, the non-specific ball entry section moves the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so the player can then By letting the game ball enter the ball, it is possible to start a game in a specific control state without letting the game ball enter the specific ball entry section. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature H9.
In the gaming machine described in feature H7 or feature H8 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that the game in the specific control state that is started when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means is the second specific game.

According to feature H9 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means is the second specific game, so the opening/closing ball entering means is changed from the closed state to the open state. In the case where the player enters the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means, the player starts a second specific game that provides the player with a higher value than the first specific game. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature H10.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Feature H7 to Feature H9 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing ball entry means is
a first receiving part (each plate-shaped body 513) for receiving a game ball that has entered the opening/closing ball entry means;
a second receiving part (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second ball entry part;
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, the open state shifts to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part, the closed state shifts to the open state. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature H10 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entering means transitions from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball in the first receiving part, and receives the game ball in the second receiving part. Since the closed state is shifted to the open state, the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other motive power such as electric power.

Feature H11.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features H7 to H10 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (a left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry portion and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry portion;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on the first path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second game state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine switches from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to feature H11 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue playing the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the first path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the opening/closing ball entry means via the first path. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means will transition from the open state to the closed state, so the player must change the gaming state to the specific control state by the time the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. You can play games with the expectation that you will

Feature H12.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features H7 to H10 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
It includes a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 37),
The gaming machine is
a first route (left-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section;
a second route (right-handed hitting route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry section and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section;
and the opening/closing ball entering means disposed on a third path (weak hitting route) different from the first path and the second path,
The gaming state transition means is
a first game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is lower than the first starting ball entering section;
a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of a ball entering the second starting ball entering section is higher than the first starting ball entering section;
comprising a gaming state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, and after executing the internal lottery a predetermined number of times, switches the game state to the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state is switched from the first gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to feature H12 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, the player can continue playing the game until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the player is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second path. After that, it becomes difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry section via the second route, so the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entry section via the first route. This allows an internal lottery to be performed. Furthermore, in the case where the opening/closing ball entering means is disposed on the third path, the player can move the opening/closing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state and then execute the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will not enter the opening/closing ball entry means. In this case, the opening/closing ball entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Feature H13.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H12 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
The variable ball entry means includes a croon (crown 53E) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that has entered the ball,
A game machine characterized in that the specific ball entering section and the non-specific ball entering section are provided on the rolling surface and allow game balls rolling on the rolling surface to enter.

According to feature H13 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry section and the non-specific ball entry section are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the player can determine where the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means will go. will be paying attention to. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

According to the feature H group of the present invention, it is possible to expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a game board is equipped with a firing means that fires game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and when the game balls enter an operating port (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. Gaming machines that perform this are known. For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.

However, after the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to the specific control state, it follows the same flow and starts the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the player's action is involved. There is a problem in that the series of steps from transitioning the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1.
A firing means (a firing handle 27) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area that can enter the game ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a lottery entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) for executing lottery entry,
Variable ball entry means (variable ball entry mechanism 52H) that allows game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the lottery entry ball means. Equipped with
The variable ball entry means is
an on-off valve (on-off valve 526) that has an open state that allows game balls entered into the variable ball entry means to pass through and a closed state that does not allow them to pass through, and switches between the open state and the closed state;
A first route (execution gate route) that guides the game ball that has passed through the on-off valve to the first flow path (downstream guide passage 522b), and a second flow path (downstream guide path 522b) that is different from the first flow path. a route switching valve (plate 523a) for switching between the first route and the second route;
A first ball entry enable state (execution) in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area is set to be able to enter the game ball so as to pass through the opening/closing valve when the route is switched to the first route by the route switching valve. a state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the gate so as to pass through the opening/closing valve when the route is switched to the second route by the route switching valve; 1. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a ball entering possible state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the two ball entering possible states (clune ball entering state).

According to feature I1 of the present invention group, the ball entering possible state switching means switches between the first ball entering possible state and the second ball entering possible state, and the first ball entering possible state is set by the route switching valve. When the first route is switched, a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the game area so as to pass through the on-off valve, and when the second ball entry is possible, the second ball is set to enter the ball by the route switching valve. The game ball flowing down the game area is set to be allowed to enter the game area so as to pass through the on-off valve when the route is switched. Therefore, the player pays attention to the timing of switching the on-off valve to the open state, so the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature I2.
In the gaming machine described in feature I1 of the present invention group,
The ball entry enabled state switching means switches between the first ball entry enabled state and the second ball entry enabled state based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the lottery entry means. A gaming machine characterized by switching states.

According to feature I2 of the present invention group, the ball entering possible state switching means selects the first ball entering possible state and Since the second ball entry possible state is switched, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the lottery entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature I3.
In the gaming machine described in feature I1 or feature I2 of the present invention group,
The first route provides a predetermined value to the player by guiding the game ball to the first channel, and the second route guides the game ball to the second channel. A gaming machine characterized in that the game machine provides a player with a higher value than the first channel.

According to feature I3 of the present invention group, since the second route provides a higher value to the player than the first channel by guiding the game ball to the second channel, the player can: It is expected that the ball-entering state switching means will switch to the second ball-entering state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

According to the feature group I of the present invention, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a game board is equipped with a firing means that fires game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and when the game balls enter an operating port (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. Gaming machines that perform this are known. For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.

However, after the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to the specific control state, it follows the same flow and starts the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the player's action is involved. There is a problem in that the series of steps from transitioning the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1.
A firing means (a firing handle 27) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area that can enter the game ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a lottery entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) for executing lottery entry,
Variable ball entry means (variable ball entry mechanism 52H) that allows game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the lottery entry ball means. Equipped with
The variable ball entry means is
A first route (execution gate route) that guides the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to the first channel (downstream guide passage 522b), and a second channel that is different from the first channel. a route switching valve (plate 523a) for switching between the first route and the second route;
The first route provides value to the player over a predetermined period of time by guiding the game ball through the first flow path, and the second route provides value to the player by guiding the game ball through the second flow path. A gaming machine characterized in that by guiding a ball, value is given to a player over a longer period of time than the first route.

According to feature J1 of the present invention group, the first route gives value to the player over a predetermined time by guiding the game ball to the first channel, and the second route gives value to the player over a predetermined time. By guiding the game ball through the second channel, value is given to the player over a longer period of time than the first route, so if the player is switched to the first route using the route switching valve, When the game is switched to the second route, the player can enjoy the game to the fullest. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature J2.
In the gaming machine described in feature J1 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) that rolls the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means;
A croon (crown 53) is provided on the rolling surface and has a ball entry part (holes 533A to 533C) into which a game ball rolling on the rolling surface enters,
A game machine characterized in that the second route guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the croon by guiding the game ball to the second flow path.

According to feature J2 of the present invention group, the second route guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the croon by guiding the game ball to the second flow path, so the player is guided through the first flow path. Value can be assigned over a longer period of time, and the player pays attention to the fate of the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature J3.
In the gaming machine described in feature J1 or feature J2 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
an on-off valve (on-off valve 526) that has an open state that allows game balls entered into the variable ball entry means to pass through and a closed state that does not allow them to pass through, and switches between the open state and the closed state;
the route switching valve that guides the game ball that has passed through the on-off valve to the first flow path or the second flow path;
A first ball entry enable state (execution) in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area is set to be able to enter the game ball so as to pass through the opening/closing valve when the route is switched to the first route by the route switching valve. a state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the gate so as to pass through the opening/closing valve when the route is switched to the second route by the route switching valve; 1. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a ball entering possible state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the two ball entering possible states (clune ball entering state).

According to feature J3 of the present invention group, the ball entering possible state switching means switches between the first ball entering possible state and the second ball entering possible state, and the first ball entering possible state is set by the route switching valve. A game ball flowing down the gaming area is set to be allowed to enter the game area so that it passes through the on-off valve when the first route is switched, and it opens and closes when the route switching valve is switched to the second route. The game ball is set to be able to enter the game area as it passes through the valve. Therefore, the player pays attention to the timing of switching the on-off valve to the open state, so the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature group J of the present invention, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a game board is equipped with a firing means that fires game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and when the game balls enter an operating port (starting ball entry means), an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. Gaming machines that perform this are known. For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.

However, after the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to the specific control state, it follows the same flow and starts the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the player's action is involved. There is a problem in that the series of steps from transitioning the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10...Pachinko machine, 35...General winning opening, 36...Upper operating opening, 37...Lower operating opening, 38...Variable winning device, 38a...Big winning opening, 38b...Opening/closing door, 38c...Variable winning driving unit, 39...Out Mouth, 47... Symbol display device, 60... Main control device, 62... MPU, 90... Sound emission control device, 92... MPU, 100... Display control device, 102... MPU.

Claims (1)

A launching device that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, and a starting ball that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter the game area and performs an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game ball. and a game state transition means for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. It is a machine,
The game ball has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter the game area, and changes from the open state to the closed state based on the game ball entering the game area. an opening/closing ball entry means that transitions to;
and variable ball entry means for allowing game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter the game ball based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the starting ball entry means,
The variable ball entry means is
a first ball entry means that allows a game ball entered into the variable ball entry means to enter the ball and does not cause the opening/closing ball entry means to shift from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball;
a second ball entry means that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter the ball, and shifts the opening/closing ball entry means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of the game ball;
The gaming state transition means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, when the game ball enters any of the opening/closing ball entry means, the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means, the specific control state comprising a specific control start means for starting the game;
The game in the specific control state is
A first specific game,
and a second specific game that provides a higher value to the player than the first specific game,
The specific control starting means executes either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters either the first ball entering device or the second ball entering device. A gaming machine characterized by:

Images